ATROPOS PRESS
new york
•
dresden
General Editor:
Wolfgang Schirmacher
Editorial Board:
Giorgio Agamben
3LHUUH$OIHUL
Hubertus von Amelunxen
Alain Badiou
Judith Balso
Judith Butler
Diane Davis
Chris Fynsk
Martin Hielscher
Geert Lovink
Larry Rickels
Avital Ronell
Michael Schmidt
)ULHGULFK8OIHUV
Victor Vitanza
Siegfried Zielinski
Slavoj æLçHN
© 201 by *DEULHOOH&ROOHW
Think Media EGS Series is supported by the European Graduate School
FRYHUGHVLJQE\'DPLHQ0RQDFR
ATROPOS PRESS
New York • Dresden
151 First Avenue # 14, New York, N.Y. 10003
all rights reserved
= H UR6SDFHV
3RwHVLVDQGWKH$UWRI
&ROODERUDWLYH&UHDWLYLW\
*DEULHOOH&ROOHW
Contents
Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
PART I: The Theories
1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
1.1 The Course of the Research . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
2. What is Called Zero? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
2.1 Zero and Science . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
2.2 Zero and Theology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
2.3 Zero and Philosophy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
2.3.1 Zeno . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
2.3.2 Zero, Jacques Derrida and The Poets:
A One Act Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
3. Poïesis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
3.1 Poet as Maker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
3.2 Poiesis and Dēmiourgia. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
3.3 Poiesis’ Relationship with Creation, Destruction and
Metamorphosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
3.4 Poiesis and Plato’s Nature of Eros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
3.5 Poiesis and Giambattista Vico . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
3.6 Poïesis with Martin Heidegger
and Henri Bergson . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
3.7 Poïesis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
4. What is a ‘Genius’? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
PART II: The Arts
5.A Synoptic Archeology of the Poetry-Poets . . . . . . . . . . .101
5.1 The Early Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Egypt and Iraq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Greece . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
5.2 On Missionary Prophesying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
4
Table of Contents
5
Dante Aligheri. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
5.3 On Evolving Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
William Shakespeare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
5.4 On Liberated Stream of Consciousness . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
5.4.1 Goethe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
5.4.2 Charles Baudelaire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
5.4.3 William Blake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
5.4.4 Emily Dickinson . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
5.5 On the “thing-in-itself ” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Samuel Beckett . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
5.6 Into the Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
5.6.1 Alessandro De Francesco . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
6. A Synoptic Archeology of Visual Poets . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
6.1 The Early Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
6.2 Diegetic and Mimetic Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Greece . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
Rome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
6.3 Art as Symbolic Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
Renaissance Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
Baroque and Rococo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Symbolic Shades of Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
Neoclassical Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
6.4 On Conscious Liberation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
Romantic Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
Realist Movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
Impressionists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
6.5 On Subconscious Liberation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
Post Impressionist / Expressionist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
6.6 On Cutting it All to Pieces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
6.7 On Elimination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Abstract Expressionism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
6.8 Back Into the Empty Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
7.A Synoptic Archeology of Sound Poets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
7.1 The Early Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
Echoes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
Rhythm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
Silence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
7.1 The Art of Melody and Harmony . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
7.2 The Art of Discord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
6
Z(e)ro Spaces
7.3 The Art of Dissonance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
7.4 The Art of Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
7.5 The Beginning of Silence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
7.6 The Art of Resonance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
7.7 Sonic Boom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
7.8 Silence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
PART III : Conclusion
8. D’où Venons Nous / Que Sommes Nous /
Où Allons Nous: The Birth of the Art of Collaboration:
Creating Fictive World Formulae . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
BIBLIOGRAPHY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
This book is dedicated to my son, Julien, whose
boundless love, cheer and encouragement
always keeps me inspired.
I would like to express my deepest gratitude to Alessandro
De Francesco, who never failed to extend his eyes, ears,
exacting intellect, poetic sensibility and emancipating sense
of humor and delight throughout the entire process of the
work. Without his support and humble creative genius I
may have never made it to the finish line.
I would like to equally extend gratitude to the sweetest
two ladies, and the kindest man I know, who’ve expressed
the most heartfelt friendship, comfort and laughter as I
plodded through the abyss. To my philosopher friend,
who’s encyclopedic brain always keeps me on my toes, my
theological friend who always read the work and offered
great advice, and my ex-husband, who always believed in
me no matter the circumstance helped fund me through
this work:
Xavier Chevalier
Sarah Hannis
Julia Hölz
Sina Badiei
Jason W. Hammonds
Mark Camaj
To Wolfgang Schirmacher: without your genius the
European Graduate School and the priceless inspiration it
breathes into life, would quite simply never exist—all of this
work was inspired by your willingness to offer education a
more fertile earth.
Foreword
GABRIELLE COLLET’S WORK Z(e)ro Spaces: Poiesis and
the Art of Collaborative Creativity is an ambitious theoretical
experiment whose aim is to produce a general approach to
the notion of collaboration through a vast series of historical
examples taken from different artistic practices. Collet’s purpose
is to produce a theory able to support an innovatory pedagogical
project where some of the key-themes of her theoretical propositions come into practice.
Collet’s démarche is inspired by French Deconstructionism
and therefore fruitfully spans from chapters written in academicphilosophical English to creative writing re-formulations of
her thesis, such as in particular theatrical dialogues where
the philosopher will of course sense a sometimes ironical
reference to Plato’s method. In those dialogues, in a perfectly
metabolized deconstructionist fictional approach, philosophers,
artists and writers of different epochs discuss together as they
were the characters of the same play, so that Collet’s theory of
collaboration acquires not only a pedagogical purpose, but also a
diachronic and trans-disciplinary theoretical geography.
By the same token, the deconstruction doesn’t only attack
the academical style or the geo-historical linearity, but also
the different artistic and literary genres approached by Collet
and the traditional distinctions made within those genres, like
for instance between a literary poetry-poetry and (external)
experiments such as sound, performative, visual and concrete
poetry. The different poetic and artistic examples belong to the
wider and more comprehensive notion of poiesis - a notion
that is increasingly being used in the contemporary thought
9
10
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part I — The Theories
(e.g. in Fabien Vallos’s theory of art) - from the Greek poiein”
(to make). The poiein defines a concept of poetry as a
collection of practices and collaborative contexts able to
modify and influence the real.
Hence, fiction in Collet’s study must not be understood
as a creation of parallel representational dimensions: through
the core concept of Fictive World Formulae inspired by
Giambattista Vico and Markus Gabriel, Collet uses the
notion of “fiction” as a generator of possibility. A fictive
world, in other words, is what Deleuze calls the “virtual” :
not a parallel world or a constructed representation, but a
poiein as creation of possibility within the real. The theme
of possibility is in this sense underlying and sustaining the
whole project: the purpose of an intellectual and pedagogical
collaboration, suggests Collet, is to create possibility;
collaboration consists in generating possibility. This is maybe
the ultimate meaning of what Collet calls “Zero spaces”.
Alongside with Alain Badiou’s ontological notion of ensemble
vide, the zero space is an empty space not in a nihilistic sense,
but as a void that contains all the possibilities that can
be generated in collaborative contexts. The Zero space is the
space in which the fictive world formulae are created. It is a
literal, in-the-world model of creation. As the author doesn’t
fail to underline, the “zero” is not only a set but also a circle,
i.e. a context of collaboration in which the poiein as creation of
possibility can take place.
Alessandro De Francesco
Preface
I BELIEVE IT IS OF IMPORT TO ANNOUNCE, at the
behest of the critical readers who will approach this work, that
the lens through which I myself entered it, was an intentional
modification/alteration even minimization of concepts and
language so as to hopefully make the work accessible, and
eventually, capture mostly the attention of the poets who
may have little or no prior visitations with theory, or whose
modus operandi in embracing living and creating, (rather than
scholarly research), may in the same light, greatly benefit from
a brief examination of theory which acts merely as an aid in
consciousness through their creative processes. As I wrote this
work with the objective of creating a basic theory for an arts
collaborative foundation I wish to create, so that poets from
the four quarters of the whole, (visual, sound, performance,
poetry), may venture forth in the propositions I make in the
argument, to collaborate poetically, making Fictive World
Formulae annually, in the capable position that the spectators
examine themselves, internally, externally, historically,
separately and as a whole common brea(d)th of existence,
as it was yesterday, is in perpetual motion today, and might
arrive in the future, or as the artist Paul Gauguin inscribed
in his painting, “D’où Venons Nous / Que Sommes Nous / Où
allons nous, (Where do we come from? What are we? Where
are we going?).
11
PART I
The Theories
1.
Introduction
In the case of the creative mind, it seems to me, the intellect
has withdrawn its watchers from the gates, and the ideas
rush in pell-mell, and only then does it review and inspect
the multitude...Hence your complaints of unfruitfulness, for
you reject too soon and discriminate too severely.
—SCHILLER, Letter 1st of December 1788
I’m not saying that Resnais, and Prigogine, or Godard, and
Thom are doing the same thing. I’m pointing out, rather,
that there are remarkable similarities between scientific
creators of functions and cinematic creators of images. And
the same goes for philosophical concepts, since there are
distinct concepts of these spaces.
—Alan SOKAL
For the authors of those great poems which we admire, do
not attain to excellence through the rules of any art; but
they utter their beautiful melodies of verse in a state of
inspiration, and, as it were, possessed by a spirit not their
own.
—PLATO
THIS BOOK—a detective-style investigation—arose out of
curiosity for the common experience documented universally
by ‘poetic geniuses’ throughout the span of recorded
humanistic expression. Intended originally to focus on an
archaeology of the poetry-poets1 adventures of our past, as
1
Alessandro De Francesco, Pour une théorie non-dualiste de la poésie (19601989), PhD dissertation, University of Paris-Sorbonne, PhD advisor: Georges
15
16
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part I — The Theories
most customary inquiries do, the journey took a number of
detours and bypaths ending in what one can only imagine as
nothing more than the beginning into a world of potentialities.
What began as a quest to better understand the sublime
occurrence in the act of poetic ingenuity: the moment when
nothing and infinity transpierce the physical and mental
awakened being, urging it to express what is sometimes
considered mystic—the unknown, unknowable, even unto
the poet It-self, ended as a discovery that this experience is so
universal and timeless—repeatedly recounted throughout the
history of documented vestiges of creation, in all fields where
creative acts occur, that it almost seemed futile to further
investigation.
This non-tangible, indescribable, timeless space where the
so-called transcendent/immanent occurs within an individual,
stimulating the apparition of creation, came to be conceptually
known as, (for lack of a better nomination), a zero space. So
then, what about it? Traversing disciplines far and wide, lost
and groping in the dark, the investigation crossed through ages
and seas of philosophy, religions, mythologies, biographies,
poetry, literature, art, and music until years passed and it
occurred that perhaps the focus wasn’t really about this sea
of zero spaces after all. They were all over the place—global
—ubiquitous. It might take over two thousand pages or more
to document a genealogy of their presence(s) in the past, and
present. So what happens next? Rather, how does the mindful
knowledge of the existence of this space we go into when
creating—help aid towards a progressive future?
Molinié, pp. 21-22 and 380-381.
Poïesis and the Art of Collaborative Creativity
17
1.1 The Course of the Research
The characteristics and regulations of intellectual history
today are such that to try and deal in one work with a range
of texts, art, music and performance spanning the period
from cavemen to the contemporary world would be to invite
derision, if not ridicule. No matter. The subject was too
curious to be abandoned. But it would need to be handled in a
particular way; it would need to take the form of a step by step
investigation synthesized simplistically into compartments of
compact and diluted brevity from which a spawning of endless
other investigations might arise—and that is exactly what this
research has come to be.
As the topic is so universal and timeless, different
recipients will have different reactions to what is omitted,
whether in terms of topics covered, levels of detail, or of
discussion of scholarly debates. These omissions are inevitable
in a work of this scope, since its aim is not to be comprehensive
but rather to trace a selective analysis with an overall
coherence, for the poets themselves.
The first section of the dissertation begins by exploring
the etymology and implications of the titular word Z(e)
ro across varying disciplines: a multiplicity of usages in the
contemporary world. Extending through the fields of theology,
physics, and philosophy—through this brief encounter with
the concept and vicissitudes of zero, we hopefully arrive at a
more concrete appreciation for the word as the eponymous
conceptual space used in this work.
The next section offers a careful examination of the word
poiesis—as many know, from the Greek verb poieō, infinitive
poiein, “to make form”. This primary sense of making form
is significant when discussing the term poiēsis in the context
of poetry and poetics. “The poet is homo faber (man, the
18
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part I — The Theories
maker) and the poem as the made thing are commonplaces
that persist throughout the history of Western poetics, often in
tension with other formulations that identify the ‘poetic genius’
as prophet and seer (Latin vates), as a vessel of the divine
inspiration, or as ‘the transcendent voice of the age’”2; either
that, and/or utterly mad: the dyonisian/apollonian contrast
of oscillating historical perspectives. The poetic geniuses or
creators of epics, mythologies, visions, and travel guides to
better living, (i.e. philosophers, political leaders, religious
founders, etc.) have been characterized since time immemorial
in stark, diametrically opposed considerations—and all the
multiplicities in-between. Perhaps all are at least partially
correct in their assessments.
It transpired from here, that while these ‘geniuses’ from
all disciplines, (including but not limited to the visual-poets,
sound-poets, performing arts-poets, and poetry-poets)3,
were recounting throughout history their experiences in
this sort of mystic space of creation we will call for lack of a
better term, zero space(s)—just as frequently these ‘poetic
geniuses’ seemed also to be the ones carrying the burden
for prophecies and visions—often lost and wandering
in solitude through the centuries; their words and/or
creations often discovered posthumously. As solitude and
isolation has been a common theme amongst creators
especially since the aggrandizing technological advances in
telecommunications and media—yet, collaboration amongst
artists has been known to stimulate and awaken more
2
Greene, Roland, Stephen Cushman, Clare Cavanagh, Jahan Ramazani, Paul F.
Rouzer, Harris Feinsod, David Marno, and Alexandra Slessarev. The Princeton
Encyclopedia of Poetry and Poetics. Princeton: Princeton UP, 2012. Print.
3
Alessandro De Francesco, Pour une théorie non-dualiste de la poésie (19601989), PhD dissertation, University of Paris-Sorbonne, PhD advisor: Georges
Molinié, pp. 21-22 and 380-381.
Poïesis and the Art of Collaborative Creativity
19
profound communications and hence, elaborate creations—
this work will argue for the advancement of collaboration
amongst the poetic arts, (visual, sound, performance, poetry)
towards an objective of creating Fictive World Formulae.
(This nomination is created in combining references to
both Giambattista Vico’s notion of the fictive as the third
ground between truth and fable that we properly see as
being opposed to one another, (see chapter 3.5), and Markus
Gabriel’s definition of the metaphysician as “a creator of
world formulas”). The formula changes to formulae in a
conceptual sense, as the replacement of the mother’s milk,
when organic nourishment is lacking. What are we creating
to feed the world into a sustainable existence? In other
words, the collaborating poets would essentially become
contemporary meta and pata-physicians, (from Alfred Jarry’s
definition of pataphysician as “the science of imaginary
solutions, which symbolically attributes the properties of
objects, described by their virtuality, to their lineaments”)4
These, what we will call mepaphysicians, will invent works
through sound, visuals, words and movement, and the use
of both metaphor and pataphor, to create potentialities of
global mythologies each year, hence, Fictive World Formulae
which could be transmitted via contemporary technological
advancements, to a global audience.
Subsequently, we will continue with a brief analysis of
the etymological development of the word ‘genius’. What is
a ‘genius’, where does the concept originate, does it have any
significance today?
4
Jarry, Alfred, and Simon Watson. Taylor. Exploits & Opinions of Doctor
Faustroll, Pataphysician: A Neo-scientific Novel. Boston, MA: Exact Change,
1996. Print. p.21-23
20
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part I — The Theories
Next, the work traces through a synoptic archeology of
encounters with the poetry-poets5 through the ages. We will
observe the changing focus, paradigmatic shifts and delivery
through different epochs, weaving across the globe and attempt
at determining which (non)-direction the contemporary
literary world is moving in order to examine the thread of zero
spaces engaging the movement and wordsmiths multiplicity of
descriptions and usages of their awareness in the space therein
At this point, we will examine another synthesized version
of poiesis in visual artistry: from the first known beginnings of
visual creations in cave paintings to key movements and periods
spanning the duration of human existence. Witnessing the
global trends of influence via the lens of the neuropsychological
(en)optic model of the seven principles of perception—
replication, fragmentation, integration, super-positioning,
juxtaposition-ing, reduplication, and rotation—we will attempt
at unearthing the alternating usage through the evolution of
visual perceptions throughout time. Perhaps once we examine
these particulars, we may be able to see where the visuals are
taking us today.
Music and sound art can be traced back to prehistoric
times and is often interrelated with the visual and linguistic.
In this section of the work we will investigate the origins and
evolution of this wordless, visionless art that has the power
to evoke the most profound and penetrating reactions in the
human psyche. Traversing the realms of melody, harmony,
discord, dissonance, noise, resonance, sonic boom and silence
this section of the study will attempt to work out the common
fiber of zero spaces echoing through the history of music and
5
Alessandro De Francesco, Pour une théorie non-dualiste de la poésie (19601989), PhD dissertation, University of Paris-Sorbonne, PhD advisor: Georges
Molinié, pp. 21-22 and 380-381.
Poïesis and the Art of Collaborative Creativity
21
sound and into the contemporary world.
As thus far in the investigation the work has piecemeal
dissected the operative words in the title-tiles of the collage,
Zero-Spaces: Poiesis and the Art of Collaborative Creativity,
we now arrive at the last two implicit wor(l)ds of the research,
collaboration and creativity. Creativity: the ancient moniker,
poïesis: making form. This contemporary appellation known
predominantly now as creativity is a term which can be
defined as: to create is to act in the world, or on the world in a
new and significant way. To act in the world is to perform an
action; to act on the world is to form or make something. The
verb ‘to create’ (French, créer, German, schöpfen) is different
from ‘to make’ (faire, machen) or ‘to produce’ (produire;
erzeugen) as neither of these necessarily involves newness.
What in Latin differentiated creare from facere (to make)
was the sense of bringing something into the world which
did not previously exist. The former was used of generating a
new entity (e.g. Lucretius ‘natura creatrix’), or of begetting a
child, or of establishing a new legal status. At a certain point
in time, (in the last 150 years), the paradigmatic shift in the
exceptional value placed on this conceptual attribute within a
human being, changed from one of irresolute, unprincipled,
often vulgarly hedonistic and sometimes intolerably insane
connotation of the creative spirit, “to the belief that the human
creative attribute is unproblematically benign. With respect
to the latter, contemporary society offers individuals a high
degree of personal freedom by cherishing individuality –to
realize a unique self has become a new kind of imperative.
Though the very molds which have made this realizable also
contradict its fulfillment.”6
6
Mason, John Hope. The Value of Creativity: The Origins and Emergence of a
Modern Belief. Aldershot, Hampshire, England: Ashgate, 2003. Print.
22
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part I — The Theories
[t]he inherent obverse of ‘Be your true Self!’ is…the
injunction to cultivate permanent refashioning, in
accordance with the postmodern postulate of the subject’s
indefinite plasticity…in short, extreme individualism
reverts to its opposite, leading to the ultimate identity crisis:
subjects experience themselves as radically unsure, with no
‘proper face’, changing from one imposed mask to another,
since what is behind that mask is ultimately nothing, a
horrifying void they are frantically trying to fill in with
their compulsive activity…7
The social fragmentation which has co-existed with this
shift in belief (the ever more diminished sense of belonging
in a wider society) has compromised the level of recognition
that can endorse such uniqueness. We have no globalcommunity myth(s) to unite us—few collaborative creative
efforts which without trying manumit the unique speciality
within the individual poetic creator(s). “At the beginning of
the 20th century the undiscovered territory was that which lay
within; at the start of the 21st century the vanishing continent
is that of collective experience, or common identification, or
shared values. What we are left with is intensely pronounced
particulars delivering ever more diminishing returns. As the
aggregate of ‘creative individuals’ increases, their produce
seems more reductive, less inspiring, and the effects: infinitely
fading. One of the explanations for this could be found in the
discrepancy between our attitude to art (based on historical
achievements and the promise which the aesthetic has offered
in the past) and what contemporary art (visual, musical and
literary) indeed provides.”8
7
Zizek, Slavoj. The Ticklish Subject: the Absent Centre of Political Ontology.
London: Verso, 1999.
8 Mason, John Hope. The Value of Creativity: The Origins and Emergence of a
Modern Belief. Aldershot, Hampshire, England: Ashgate, 2003. Print.
Poïesis and the Art of Collaborative Creativity
23
The fact that with the simplistic motion of our finger, we
have access to an immeasurable world of visual(s), objects,
musical compositions, compilations of sound bites, and literary
texts which traverse through centuries of creations until the
contemporary day, has crippled our need for new art.
While in the music, visual and literary arts “the shared
symbolic languages and conventions of the previous five
centuries have broken down, the result appears to be an
abundance of talent, invention, wit and brilliance - but a
scarcity of significance”9. It is due to this notion, perhaps,
that the word poïesis is slowly making a comeback in our
vocabulary. Enough of the ‘creatives’: where have the ‘poetic
geniuses’ and visionaries gone, how can we find them, and
perhaps bring them back and inspire them to help guide us
into the next global epoch?
Especially at this point in our civilization, when technical
accomplishments have raised the specter of the annihilation
of all living beings, the healing power of art is needed. In the
encounter of humanity with its historical fate, the possibility
of creative transformation of the demonic forces of history
must be kept open. The use of the arts as a means of healing
the soul testifies to the inherent power of men and women to
confront the depths of their own pain and to emerge with a
sense that life is indeed worth living.10
— Stephen K. Levine
Thereupon, we come to our final word in the titular
locution: collaboration. 1802, from French collaborateur,
from Latin collaborator, past participle of collaborare “work
with,” from col- “together” + laborare “to work”. 1860, from
9
Ibid.
Levine, Stephen K. Poiesis: The Language of Psychology and the Speech of the
Soul. London: Jessica Kingsley Pub., 1997. Print.
10
24
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part I — The Theories
French collaboration, noun of action from Latin collaborare.
In a bad sense, “traitorous cooperation with an occupying
enemy,” it is recorded in 1940 with reference to the Vichy
Government of France collaborating with the Nazi party
in Germany. Throughout the research we will probe the
varying continents on the planet to discover how new forms
of creation are popping up which seem to sprout from
multiple forms of collaboration. We will explore briefly the
tensions derived from the original meaning and how they are
implicated (or not) in today’s usage of the word across the
varying disciplines. Further we will consider how efficient
contemporary collaborators are at working together and why
‘creative collaboration’ seems to be the buzzword of the new
century in more than just the artistic scene.
Finally, the work will attempt to thread all the pieces
together to determine whether it could be worth the
experiment to gather thee poetic geniuses while we may,
(sound, visual, performance, poetry), with the help of
strategic conductors, curators and editors, in varying pockets
around the globe, to go into their zero spaces, both alone and
together, engaging in collaborative creative projects to develop
potentialities of global mythologies, or Fictive World Formulae,
(FWF’s) –engaging the world, but more-so, motivating people
to come together and awaken humanity to take action against
the collective suicide towards which it is heading.
Ecological crisis is caused by
our anthropocentric world
view—we don’t respect, or
care for anything else except
ourselves, we are turning
Poïesis and the Art of Collaborative Creativity
25
nature and ourselves against
us. What we call nature is our
own generation, making—
how do we get rid of these self
understanding of humanity—by
thinking! Philosophers said we
are like Gods, can do anything,
everything is to serve us, we
need to criticize that!11
In order to do so, we would need to use the invent
of modern technology and our contemporary media and
communication devices to broadcast, free of charge, each year,
the realization of such global scale productions to awaken
the masses into ‘thinking’—through collaborative poetic
creations (between the four artistic disciplines) which provoke
imaginations into action. And into the zero spaces...
Schirmacher, Wolfgang, “MEDIA AESTHETICS: The Homo Generator.”
European Graduate School, Saas-Fée. Aug. 2011. Lecture.
11
2.
What is
Called Zero?
FROM THE FACILE etymological-metaphorical linkage
to inspiration and creativity, to the uncanny symbolic
partnerships one can almost effortlessly unite through
examining current findings in scientific fields, Zero, as the
identifying nomination to pre-creative space, moreover as the
overarching repeated concept examined in this work, seemed
almost predisposed to assuming itself as the leading titular
role. Zero, from the French, zéro; from Venetian, zero, which
(together with cypher) came via Italian zefiro, “wind from
the sea”, from Arabic Safira = “it was empty”, Sifr = “zero”,
“nothing”. Just as inspiration is derived from the Latin inspirare
‘inspire, inflame, blow into’, stimulation or arousal of the mind,
feelings, etc., to special or unusual activity or creativity.
A breath of wind from the wings of madness.
Charles Baudelaire “Les Fleurs du Mal” 1857
The ancients suggested that creative ideas are breathed
into a human agent by some divine or mystical force (daemon
or genius). “...whatever powers are considered possible
transmitters of the inspired idea, the receiver always knows
that in a sense, beyond their own efforts, they have housed
visitors from elsewhere in their thought. Inspiration—
27
28
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part I — The Theories
breathing life into something, intuition, the instantaneous
appearance of the idea or a gaping open of the new... Whoever
experiences inspired ideas can, even in post-metaphysical or
hetero-metaphysical times, understand themselves as host or
matrix for the non-own.”12
In his Key of the Sciences, the Persian encyclopedist
Muhammad ibn Ahmad al-Khwarizmi asserts that while
calculating, if no number appears in the place of tens, one
should use a little circle “to keep the rows.”13 Row: “line of people
or things,” Old English ræw, “a row, line; succession”, from ProtoGermanic, rai(h)waz (cf. Middle Dutch rie, Dutch rij “row”;”
Old High German rihan “to thread”; Old Norse rega “string”)..
from PIE root rei- “to scratch, tear, cut” (cf. Sanskrit rikati
“scratches.” rekha “line”). The circle one was to draw to ‘keep
the rows’ was called sifr, “empty” in Arabic. This was the earliest
mention of the name sifr, which would eventually become zero.
Scratching beneath the surface of zero, blown from the
wind into an empty space. Upon return, stringing together
people / things—weaving magnificent new images, musical
compositions, poetic language, speech. Poiesis, after zero.
As the decimal zero and its then contemporary mathematics
extended beyond the Arabic world and over to Europe in the
Middle Ages, words derived from sifr and zephyrus came to
refer to 1) calculation, as well as 2) privileged knowledge and
secret codes. A mysterious, mystic knowledge where secrets
revealed themselves before joining forces with their cousin(s):
calculation, assessment, analysis, examination, investigation,
inquiry, study, learning, education, knowledge, wisdom.
Sloterdijk, Peter. “The Allies; Or, The Breathed Commune.” Introduction.
Bubbles. Cambridge, Mass: Semiotext(e), 2011. N. pag. Print.
13
“0 (number).” Wikipedia. Wikimedia Foundation, 03 Jan. 2014. Web. 03 Mar.
2014.
12
What is Called Zero?
29
Then we probe a bit further and ask, why choose a ‘little
circle’ to keep all the rows (of people and things) together ? As
opposed to say, a triangle, square, a simple dot or infamous
slash? So let’s consider the circle for a brief moment: halfway
across to the center is a radius, passing the center to the other
side we understand as a diameter, all the way around in the
eternal return we have the circumference. In order to escape
the samsaric circumference, we need to dive into the void.
The ratio of traveling all the way around any circle, to taking
the daring route across the unknown void is ∏ (pi) – what is
otherwise known as a transcendental number. Transcendence
means different things to different disciplines. We’ll focus here
on philosophy and religion (world mythologies, metaphysical
world formulas, or as we call them here, fictive world formulae).
In short, for religion, transcendence is the concept of being
entirely beyond the universe (not a living being), in other
words, you couldn’t arrive there unless you were dead—hence
fictive world formulae, for as the saying goes, nobody has ever
died and lived to tell about it. Philosophy understands it as
climbing or going beyond some ‘philosophical concept of limit’
–so essentially, one could potentially get there still breathing.
We’ll consider the zero space as the non-concept of nothing
and infinity, beyond the limit. It cannot be defined or discussed
or reached through linguistics, fundamentally.
Thus, the transcendental non-concept blown into the
void of the circle making its way across as it threads through
residuals of people and things in a dreamscape like universe,
privileged by the calculating cousins running around the
circumference on the lookout for the daring ones who may
at any minute climb there way out and back onto the surface.
Zero, as infinite space.
30
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part I — The Theories
2.1 Zero and Science
To explore in depth the significance of zero across the sciences
would be hubristic coming from an author who has a puerile
knowledge of the science disciplines. However, it would also be
imprudent to use zero as a titular concept and not acknowledge
altogether its presence in the sciences. Thus, we will explore for
a moment a basic overview of the conceptual relevance to the
metaphoric zero in the scientific milieu of physics.
Zero-point energy, also called quantum vacuum zeropoint energy, is the lowest possible energy that a quantum
mechanical physical system may have; it is the energy of its
ground state. All quantum mechanical systems undergo
fluctuations even in their ground state and have an associated
zero-point energy, a consequence of their wave-like nature. The
uncertainty principle requires every physical system to have
a zero-point energy greater than the minimum of its classical
potential well. This results in motion even at absolute zero. In
the meditation of nothing and infinity—within a zero space,
the observer is still, silent, everything in the universe can be
observed as it passes—breath, breathing, life is still beating.
There is motion, even at absolute zero.
The Heisenberg uncertainty principle approximately states
that complementary variables (such as a particle’s position
and momentum, or a field’s value and derivative at a point in
space) cannot simultaneously be defined precisely by any given
quantum state. We are always in motion, even when sleeping.
Especially when dreaming.
In particular, there cannot be a state in which the system
sits motionless at the bottom of its potential well, for then
its position and momentum would both be completely
determined to arbitrarily great precision. One never knows
What is Called Zero?
31
what lurks within a zero space, infinitely reshaping, alteration,
complex variation.
Therefore, the lowest-energy state (the ground state) of the
system must have a distribution in position and momentum
that satisfies the uncertainty principle, which implies its energy
must be greater than the minimum of the potential well. As
long as you keep breathing, the source will keep supplying.
In quantum field theory, the fabric of space is visualized
as consisting of fields, with the field at every point in
space and time being a quantum harmonic oscillator, with
neighboring oscillators interacting. In what is known as the
Casimir effect, the vacuum energy contains contributions
from all wavelengths, except those excluded by the
spacing between plates. As the plates draw together, more
wavelengths are excluded and the vacuum energy decreases.
The decrease in energy means there must be a force doing
work on the plates as they move. The zero-point energy of
a system consisting of a vacuum between two plates will
decrease at a finite rate as the two plates are drawn together.
The vacuum energies are predicted to be infinite, but the
changes are predicted to be finite.
In other words, within a zero space (vacuum energy),
there lie infinite possibilities (intuition / subconscious), when
coming up to surface, potentialities decrease as one approaches
the rational (consciousness) — a finite rate (as the two plates
are drawn together). ‘there must be a force doing the work on
the plates’ –when poiesis and creation arrives, why from the
infinite is only finite creation born?
The seat of the soul is there where the inner and outer
worlds meet.
—Novalis
32
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part I — The Theories
Richard Feynman commences his infamous Caltech lectures with his most pithy statement of all scientific
knowledge: “If, in some cataclysm, all of scientific knowledge
were to be destroyed, and only one sentence passed on to the
next generations ..., what statement would contain the most
information in the fewest words? I believe it is ... that all things
are made up of atoms – little particles that move around in
perpetual motion, attracting each other when they are a little
distance apart, but repelling upon being squeezed into one
another. ...”14
It occurred that while examining the metaphysical and
pataphysical, as necessary to comprehending the import in
creating fictive formulae and in explaining the nature of zero
spaces, that it would also be of equal importance to consider
the physical implications of zero as well. It is with this in
mind that theories within the domain of contemporary
physics were scanned. As it haphazardly turned out, those as
described within the physical world in relation to zero, seemed
to remarkably mirror the notions of the conceptual space
reflected in this study. Hence, this brief meditative interruption
of scientific notions of Zero.
2.2 Zero and Theology
If we took all the world religions, all the spiritually induced
philosophies and conceptual theories from around the
globe and threw them into a pot on boiling water—dissolved fat straight to the bone, we would be left with same
result: eliminate desire, (physical, material, economic), social
14
Feynman, R. P., R. B. Leighton, and M. Sands. “The Feynman Lectures on
Physics.” 1963. Lecture. (p.1-2)
What is Called Zero?
33
obligation, (familial, cultural and filial), and fear from our
thoughts to arrive at tranquility of mind—universal theological
dogma.
The lexicon, visuals and sounds/music used to depict
this space one would arrive in such a condition, is as diverse
as the infinite space and time of the stories that were created
around the paths one might take to get there. To culminate
all the words used to describe this conceptual moment/space
into a cohesive representative of the ever growing totality, this
work will simply suggest that this type of condition is one of
many that can be experienced within and coming out of zero
space(s). Naturally, the theological objectives aim to arrive at
an ideal type of experience, though not necessarily always the
one experienced when following their so-called ‘determined
paths’. Something like our modern day sales trick to convince
the masses—right next to the image for advertising, (though
we know using image for mass persuasion is thousands of
years old). In any case, it is interesting to note that for some
odd reason, the ideal of this experience is realized through
theological visuals around the globe, in little (and sometimes
big) circles—the symbol, as well, of the zero.
34
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part I — The Theories
Metaphorical representation of divine emanation of successively
constricted Olamot (Spiritual Worlds) within the surrounding Ein Sof
(Divine Infinity). The attributes and qualities of God and of the Adam
Kadmon or Divine Man, God’s Image emanate out from a center that is
nowhere or nothing, being infinite, to a circumference both everywhere
and finite.
Gustave Dore’s image of the Christian concept for beatific vision from
Dante Alighieri’s Divine Comedy.
What is Called Zero?
The ba gua, a symbol commonly used to represent the Dao and its
pursuit.
The eight doors of Jannah, in Muslim belief
35
36
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part I — The Theories
Hinduism: Image of the “surest way to Nirvana”
Buddhism: Traditional Tibetan Buddhist Thangka depicting the Wheel
of Life with its six realms.
The universe as envisioned in Goussin de Metz’ “L’image Du Monde,”
published in 1245. Bibliothèque Nationale de France, Fr.14964, fol. 117
What is Called Zero?
37
Day after day, day after day
We flow with breath and motion;
As fluid as a titanium ship
Upon an infinite ocean.
Circles, circles, everywhere,
And all the religions did shrink;
Circles, circles, everywhere,
What’s a poet to think? 15
The eye is the first circle; the horizon which it forms is
the second; and throughout nature this primary figure is
repeated without end.
—Ralph Waldo Emerson
We dance around in a ring and suppose, but the secret sits
in the middle and knows.
—Robert Frost
2.3 Zero and Philosophy
2.3.1 Zeno
To begin this section we will travel back in time to a
philosopher whose appellation itself is closely linked to Zero,
and his paradox of The Dichotomy. The philosopher’s name is
Zeno. Zeno’s dichotomy paradox goes like this, (slightly reworked): Suppose Alain Badiou wants to catch a stationary
bus so he can get to a place where he could potentially witness
an event, or give a lecture discussing the finite and infinite to
arrive at a truth concept such as The One. Before he can get
there, he must get halfway there. Radius. Before he can get
halfway there, he must get a quarter of the way there. Before
traveling a quarter, he must travel one-eighth; before an eighth,
one-sixteenth; and so on. This description requires one to
complete an infinite number of tasks, which Zeno maintains
15
Pun on the ‘The Rime of the Ancient Mariner’, poem by Samuel Taylor
Coleridge, published 1798; “water, water, everywhere”.
38
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part I — The Theories
is an impossibility. Impossible to think one’s way through
to the other side. Hence, imagining or inventing a finite
concept or ‘truth’ through the use of mathematics or logic,
is an impossibility. The logicians and mathematicians fail
to cut across the void. The only way to potentially get there
is through the imagination, or movement—getting up off
the sedentary tush in the armchair and diving, swimming,
walking, running, dancing or whatever suits you.
This sequence also presents a second problem in that
it contains no first distance to run, for any possible, (finite)
first distance could be divided in half, and hence would
not be first after all. Hence, the trip cannot even begin. Or
impossible, once again, to calculate an origin, once again
again, only to be done through imagination—inventing
fictive creation stories, (which as we know are older than the
written word itself)—or by getting up and moving, dancing
(see aboriginal ritual mythologies).
The paradoxical conclusion then would be that travel
over any finite distance can neither be completed nor begun,
and so all motion must be an illusion. Accordingly, Vico’s
dreamscape.
An equally valid conclusion, as Henri Bergson proposed
is that motion (time and distance) is not actually divisible.
This argument is called The Dichotomy because it involves
repeatedly splitting a distance into two parts. Tension: evil
and good. In the infinity of dualisms where nothing is ever
quite in our reach to be tangible, resting in a continual
oscillation from side to side, and around and around, we get
our entire history of philosophy. In the paradox, it seems as
though the implications lead to a blurring of the distinctions
between these invented dualisms to a meditation on a third
What is Called Zero?
39
way, or as Vico would suggest, a fictive way, through the
imagination, or literal: walking.
But how does this relate to ‘zero space’ (as the
eponymous conceptual space in the text) and philosophy?
Quite simply, if we attempt at defining a zero space as
nothing and infinity, then it becomes clear the only way
to experience either/both, in response to The Dichotomy
paradox, is through the imagination and/or moving, (i.e. the
olympic athlete arriving in ‘the zone’, or dancing). We know
for certain, if we get up at point A and walk or move a certain
distance to point B, there is no reason why we wouldn’t
arrive, and it seems almost idiotic to consider otherwise.
Though as re-worked through the logic of Zeno’s paradox, it
is mathematically impossible for the result of getting there
when constantly living in dualities and slicing things in
two. Hence, as a philosophical endeavor, we might say that
Zeno would have been in favor of the phenomenological
approach of eliminating the dualisms, the interior and
exterior, the mind and body, and accordingly, combining
them for a closer investigation of zero spaces, the outside in.
If it is mathematically impossible to find a logical solution to
the obvious, then how could it be possible to find a logical
solution to anything unless using our imaginations or
physically experiencing it for proof that one can move from
point A to point B. As the two problems presented make
it impossible to find a starting point, 0, or ending point,
infinity, then it seems appropriate that a conceptual Zero
space, is, using the same logic, impossible to precise, and only
able to be experienced through the imagination, or through
moving, making, poiesis.
40
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part I — The Theories
2.3.2 Zero, Jacques Derrida and The Poets:
A One Act Play
Enters Lord Byron from stage left, looks
around struts into center stage twirling
a cane, looks down at Derrida sitting at
his desk chewing on the tip of his pencil
while staringout the window thinking.
LORD BYRON
We of the craft are all crazy...some are affected by gaiety,
others by melancholy, but all are more are less touched..16.
DERRIDA
Madness is therefore, in every sense of the word, only one
case of thought (within thought). It is therefore a question
of drawing back toward a point at which all determined
contradictions...in the form of given, factual historical
structures, can appear, and appear as relative to this zero
point at which determined meaning and non-meaning
come together in their common origin. From the point
of view which here is ours, one could perhaps say the
following about this zero point...17
LORD BYRON
What is this you say about a point? I have never seen a
point, there is an infinite space we plummet into, you
mean to say....a zero space, perhaps?
A giant shadow appears on the wall as the closet door opens
and coughing is heard. As the Being inside slowly appears
the shadow cast on the wall gets smaller and smaller until
the shadow and the man become one.
16
Gardiner, Marguerite, George Gordon Byron Byron, and Ernest J. Lovell.
Lady Blessington’s Conversations of Lord Byron. Princeton, NJ: Princeton Univ.
Pr., 1969. Print.
17
Derrida, Jacques. “Cogito and the History of Madness.” Writing and
Difference. Trans. Alan Bass. London: Routledge, 2001. N. pag. Print.
What is Called Zero?
HUSSERL
Excuse me, Lord B., but I’m trying to listen, and you’re
cutting off his words—he’s referring to what I called a zero
point of orientation: the region of pure consciousness. You
can’t “go there” with consciousness; instead you have to let
the worldly go away and then inhabit what’s left. “What
can remain, if the whole world, including ourselves with
all our cogitare, is excluded?”
LORD BYRON
A zero space, of orientation.
HUSSERL
I suppose you could call it that, now let him continue...
DERRIDA
Thank you, Edmund. As I was saying: Invulnerable to all
determined opposition between reason and unreason, it
is the point starting from which the history of the determined forms of this opposition, this opened or brokenoff dialogue, can appear as such and be stated. It is the
impenetrable point of certainty in which the possibility
of... the narration of the totality, or rather of all the
determined forms of the exchanges between reason and
madness are embedded. 18
Andre Gide flutters down on cupid wings in a giant cloth
diaper and taps Derrida over the head with a wand and
then speaks.
ANDRÉ GIDE
The most beautiful things are those that madness prompts
and reason writes, n’est ce pas?
DERRIDA
It is the point at which the project of thinking this totality
by escaping it is embedded. By escaping it: that is to say,
by exceeding the totality, which—within existence—is
18
Ibid.
41
42
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part I — The Theories
possible only in the direction of infinity or nothingness; for
even if the totality of what I think is imbued with falsehood
or madness, even if the totality of the world does not exist,
even if non-meaning has invaded the totality of the world,
up to and including the very contents of my thought, I still
think, I am while I think. 19
Ralph W. Emerson comes swimming across the floor as a
river magically appears passing underneath
the desk of Derrida . He climbs out of the river in a
transparent bathing dress and shakes himself off in a
fantastic display of enthusiasm.
EMERSON
The maker of a sentence launches out into the infinite and
builds a road into Chaos and old Night, and is followed
by those who hear him with something of wild, creative
delight.
ANDRÉ GIDE
I completely agree with you, Ralph. One does not discover
new lands without consenting to lose sight of the shore for
a very long time.
Thunder and lightening are heard outside and the room
begins to shake. Suddenly there is a crack of lightening, a
bright white flash and explosion followed by smoke and a
slow dispersion into visibility when a man in a superman
costume with a giant Z . on his chest appears in the middle
of it and begins to speak casually.
NIETZSCHE
Even the philosophical man has the presentiment that this
reality in which we live and have our being is an illusion,
that under it lies hidden a second quite different reality.
DERRIDA
Even if I do not in fact grasp the totality, if I neither
19
Ibid.
What is Called Zero?
understand nor embrace it, I still formulate the project of
doing so, and this project is meaningful in such a way that
it can be defined only in relation to a pre-comprehension
of the infinite and undetermined totality. 20
ANDRÉ GIDE
When intelligent people pride themselves on not
understanding, it is quite natural they should succeed
better than fools.
DERRIDA
This is why, by virtue of this margin of the possible,
the principled, and the meaningful, which exceeds all
that is real, factual, and existent, this project is mad,
and acknowledges madness as its liberty and its very
possibility. This is why it is not human, in the sense of
anthropological factuality, but is rather metaphysical
and demonic: it first awakens to itself in its war with the
demon, the evil genius of non-meaning, by pitting itself
against the strength of the evil genius, and by resisting him
through reduction of the natural man within itself.21
The phone rings, Derrida puts on speaker phone and a voice
is heard.
J O H N M I LT O N
Demoniac frenzy, moping melancholy, / And moon-struck
madness.
Derrida hangs up the phone, only for it to ring again, and
again, he puts it on speakerphone.
S A M U E L TAY L O R C O L E R I D G E
My case is a species of madness, only that it is a
derangement of the volition, and not of the intellectual
faculties.
20
21
Ibid.
Ibid.
43
44
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part I — The Theories
NIETZSCHE
Just as the philosopher behaves in relation to the reality
of existence, so the artistically excitable man behaves in
relation to the reality of dreams.
DERRIDA
In this sense, nothing is less reassuring than the Cogito
at its proper and inaugural moment. The project of
exceeding the totality of the world, as the totality of what
I can think in general, is no more reassuring than the
dialectic of Socrates when it, too, overflows the totality of
beings, planting us in the light of a hidden sun which is
epekeina tes ousias.22, 23
A RT H U R R I M BAU D
The first study for the man who wants to be a poet is
knowledge of himself complete: he searches for his soul,
he inspects it, he puts it to the test, he learns it. As soon as
he has learned it, he must cultivate it! I say that one
must be a seer, make oneself a seer. The poet becomes a
seer through a long, immense, and reasoned derangement
of all the senses. All shapes of love suffering, madness.
He searches himself, he exhausts all poisons in himself,
to keep only the quintessences. Ineffable torture where
he needs all his faith, all his superhuman strength, where
he becomes among all men the great patient, the great
criminal, the great accursed one—and the supreme
Scholar! For he reaches the unknown! ...So the poet is
actually a thief of Fire!
JOHN MASON HOPE
Yes, but calm down, Arthur, let us not forget: Prometheus
stole the fire from the gods. How did he do that? By
hiding it in a giant fennel-stalk. By that means he was able
to carry the fire away from Olympus, down to human
beings. It was the fennel-stalk, ferula communis, with
its soft pith and hard rind, which made his gift possible.
22
Ibid.
“Because it is beyond being” (epekeina tes ousias, a phrase from Plato’s
Republic 509b)
23
What is Called Zero?
45
The knowledge Prometheus brought us was not only about
creative capacity and power; it was also about how to
contain it. 24
ANDRÉ GIDE
I agree John, and in addition to the beginning of Arthur’s
comment: Know thyself? A maxim as pernicious as
it is ugly. Whoever observes himself arrests his own
development. A caterpillar who wanted to know itself
would never become a butterfly.
A wall size Ipad tablet lights up against the wall behind
Derrida’s chair flashing a news brief—as he slowly turns to
read it out loud:
“It’s actually hard for creative people to know themselves
because the creative self is more complex than the noncreative self,” Scott Barry Kaufman, a psychologist at New York
University who has spent years researching creativity, told
The Huffington Post. “The things that stand out the most are
the paradoxes of the creative self ... Imaginative people have
messier minds.”
DERRIDA
Thank you, Scott Barry Kaufman, for that enlightening and
profound insight.
Astonishing how as modern technology advances, language
used within it becomes increasingly more vapid...
And Glaucon was not mistaken when he cried out: “Lord!
what demonic hyperbole? daimonias hyperboles,” which is
perhaps banally translated as“marvelous transcendence.” This
demonic hyperbole goes further than the passion of hybris, at
least if this latter is seen only as the pathological modification
of the being called man. Such a hybris keeps itself within the
world. Assuming that it is deranged and excessive, it implies
the fundamental derangement and excessiveness of the hyper24
Mason, John Hope. The Value of Creativity: The Origins and Emergence of a
Modern Belief. Aldershot, Hampshire, England: Ashgate, 2003. Print.
46
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part I — The Theories
bole which opens and founds the world as such by exceeding it.
Hybris is excessive and exceeds only within the space opened
by the demonic hyperbole.
Flying in through the window with a black batman costume
on and landing on top of Derrida’s desk with a loud
THUMP.
G E O R G E B E R N A R D S H AW
The true artist will let his wife starve, his children go barefoot,
his mother drudge for his living at seventy, sooner than work at
anything but his art. To women he is half vivisector, half vampire.
He gets into intimate relations with them to study them, to strip
the mask of convention from them, to surprise their inmost
secrets, knowing that they have the power to rouse his deepest
creative energies, to rescue him from his cold reason, to make
him see visions and dream dreams, to inspire him, as he calls it.
He persuades women that they may do this for their own purpose
whilst he really means them to do it for his. He steals the mother’s
milk and blackens it to make printer’s ink to scoff at her and
glorify ideal women with. He pretends to spare her the pangs of
child-bearing so that he may have for himself the tenderness and
fostering that belong of right to her children. Since marriage began,
the great artist has been known as a bad husband. But he is worse:
he is a child-robber, a blood-sucker, a hypocrite, and a cheat. Perish
the race and wither a thousand women if only the sacrifice of them
enable him to act Hamlet better, to paint a finer picture, to write a
deeper poem, a greater play, a profounder philosophy! For mark
you, Tavy, the artist’s work is to shew us ourselves as we really are.
Our minds are nothing but this knowledge of ourselves; and he
who adds a jot to such knowledge creates new mind as surely as
any woman creates new men. In the rage of that creation he is
as ruthless as the woman, as dangerous to her as she to him, and
as horribly fascinating. Of all human struggles there is none so
treacherous and remorseless as the struggle between the artist man
and the mother woman.
Which shall use up the other? that is the issue between them.
And it is all the deadlier because, in your romanticist cant, they
love one another.
What is Called Zero?
47
Two woman are walking past the window and stick there
heads in.
CHARLOT TE WHIT TON
Whatever women do they must do twice as well as men to be
thought half as good. Luckily, this is not difficult.
MARGARET MEAD
Women want mediocre men, and men are trying hard to
become as mediocre as possible.
A knock is heard at the door. Politely walking in dressed in a
conservative suit he walks over to Derrida’s desk and hands
him a book wrapped in gift paper. He looks around and
speaks soberly.
A NAT O L E F R A N C E
It is the certainty that they possess the truth that makes men
cruel.
The screen flashes white static and suddenly the sound of a
Skype call is ringing. Derrida answers and a face appears on
the screen and speaks.
DEJAN STOJANOVIC
Even great men bow before the Sun; it melts hubris into
humility.
DERRIDA
Okay, okay. As I was saying...The extent to which doubt and the
Cartesian Cogito are punctuated by this project of a singular and
unprecedented excess—an excess in the direction of the nondetermined, Nothingness or Infinity, an excess which overflows
the totality of that which can be thought, the totality of beings and
determined meanings, the totality of factual history—is also the
extent to which any effort to reduce this project, to enclose it within
a determined historical structure, however comprehensive, risks
missing the essential, risks dulling the point itself.
48
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part I — The Theories
A little girl crawls out from under the desk of Derrida with
a lollipop in her mouth and little dress. She takes the lollipop
out of her mouth stares into his eyes and speaks to Derrida.
LITTLE GIRL
We know where you’re going with this Uncle Jackie, you
will eventually reveal the tension wherein the text reveals its
own assumptions about language, and in so doing dictates
a statement about undecidability, the difficulties inherent in
totalization, their own readability, or the limitations of textual
authority. But I think that’s just the point the poets are trying
to tell you. They know there are limitations in spoken language.
The ghost of Spinoza flashes on the screen behind Derrida’s
chair.
SPINOZA
To use language is only a crutch, something you do because
you cannot communicate otherwise.
DERRIDA
Such an effort risks doing violence to this project in turn (for
there is also a violence applicable to rationalists and to sense,
to good sense; and this, perhaps, is what Foucault’s book
definitely demonstrates, for the victims of whom he speaks
are always the bearers of sense, the true bearers of the true
and good sense hidden and oppressed by the determined
“good sense” of the“division”—the “good sense” that never
divides itself enough and is always determined too quickly—)
risks doing it violence in turn, and a violence of a totalitarian
and historicist style which eludes meaning and the origin of
meaning.
LITTLE GIRL
They know its violent, Uncle Jackie—that’s why so many of
them kill themselves trying. They go into their zero spaces
and when they come out language isn’t enough to express the
overwhelming experience inside.
49
What is Called Zero?
SEAMUS HEANEY
To Robert Lowell
You were our night ferry
thudding in a big sea,
the whole craft ringing
with an armourer’s music
the course set willfully across
the ungovernable and dangerous.
DERRIDA
Yes, yes, yes, I get the zero space (s) concept:
To grasp the operation of creative imagination at the greatest
possible proximity to it, one must turn oneself toward the
invisible interior of poetic freedom. One must be separated
from oneself in order to be reunited with the blind origin of
the work in its darkness. This experience of conversion, which
founds the literary act (writing or reading), is such that the
very words “separation” and “exile,”which always designate the
interiority of a breaking-off with the world and a making of
one’s way within it, cannot directly manifest the experience;
they can only indicate it through a metaphor whose genealogy
itself would deserve all of our efforts.25
LITTLE GIRL
I’m sorry Uncle Jackie, you did understand what they were
trying to say, my mistake. But regarding a comprehensive
genealogy of zero spaces—that would take thousands of
pages...
DERRIDA
But to continue what I was saying...For in question here is a
departure from the world toward a place which is neither a
non-place nor an other world, neither a utopia nor an alibi,
the creation of “a universe to be added to the universe,”
according to an expression of Focillon’s cited by Rousset. This
25
Derrida, Jacques. “Force and Signification.” Writing and Difference. Chicago:
University of Chicago, 1978. p.7-8 Print.
50
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part I — The Theories
universe articulates only that which is in excess of everything,
the essential nothing on whose basis everything can appear
and be produced within language; and the voice of Maurice
Blanchot reminds us, with the insistence of profundity, that
this excess is the very possibility of writing and of literary
inspiration in general. Only pure absence—not the absence of
this or that, but the absence of everything in which all presence
is announced—can inspire, in other words, can work, and
then make one work. The pure book naturally turns toward
the eastern edge of this absence which, beyond or within the
prodigiousness of all wealth, is its first and proper content.
The pure book, the book itself, by virtue of what is most
irreplaceable within it, must be the “book about nothing”.26
Spinoza flickers on the screen again.
SPINOZA
Like I keep saying, is anyone listening: to use language is only
a crutch, something you do because you cannot communicate
otherwise.
DERRIDA
As writing, communication, if one insists upon maintaining
the word, is not the means of transport of sense, the exchange
of intentions and meanings, the discourse and “communication
of consciousnesses.” We are not witnessing an end of writing
which, to follow McLuhan’s ideological representation, would
restore a transparency or immediacy of social relations; but
indeed a more and more powerful historical unfolding of a
general writing of which the system of speech, consciousness,
meaning, presence, truth, etc., would only be an effect, to
be analyzed as such. It is this questioned effect that I have
elsewhere called logocentrism.27
Ibid.
27 Derrida, Jacques. “Signature Event Context.” Limited Inc. Evanston, IL:
Northwestern UP, 1988. Print.
26
What is Called Zero?
51
LITTLE GIRL
My mum says that’s why we need to bring in all the poets,
not just the (p)oetry poets, but the (s)ound, (v)isual and (p)
erformance poets, (P.S.V.P) as well—we need to move forward
through collaboration, co-poiesis I think she calls it. The poets
still need to precise language through ‘unconcealment’, their
individual locales of existence, genius loci’s, I think the Roman’s
called them. They need to name for their discourse the
hypostasis of place(s), past, present—intuited by the individual
poets who’ve sprouted in varying locales around the globe,
(equal distribution of inter-continental representation-not just
the western domination), within the collaborative group, so
that they can communicate a common comprehension invoked
by the sound, and then visual infused with performance,
attempting to illuminate for the spectators without necessary
language. With the economy of language, and through the
use of visual, sound and movement we could potentially
reach a common global comprehension without needing
so many translations and the loss therein within language.
After each unique place is captured in all the spectrum
and shades of colors from black to white, even colorless, as
is: sometimes provocative displays, (ecological, political,
polemical, controversial)—the acoustic and visual signature of
place—accessing and divulging covered-up pockets of earth:
transparency for all nations), to the extreme diametrically
opposed calming and inspiring displays—the multiplicity.
The Poetists (dramatist-poet-orchestrators), will attempt to
weave together over-arching narrative (through the parts of the
non-narrative) to create, each year, new fictive world formulae
in magical realist shades. A school for poets to engage in copoiesis in a global effort as well to experimentally practice a
mini avowed-operative community28 where the individual is
equally as important as the whole and must collaborate to
define identity through the other expressions aside from their
own. A platform for our poets to go into zero space(s) alone
28
Nancy, Jean-Luc. The Inoperative Community. Minneapolis, MN: University
of Minnesota, 1991. Print.
Blanchot, Maurice. The Unavowable Community. Barrytown, NY: Station Hill,
1988. Print.
52
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part I — The Theories
and separately—where Others are always waiting up at the
surface. Where after the year is over, through contemporary
media and communications—will always be waiting there up
at the surface—until after a certain number of years, all the
countries in the world can be represented, then repeat.
DERRIDA
To be a poet is to know how to leave speech. 29
Blackout.
29 Derrida, Jacques. “Edmon Jabès and The Question of the Book.” Writing
and Difference. Chicago: University of Chicago, 1978. 85. Print.
3.
Poïesis
POÏESIS: (from the Greek verb poieō, infinitive poiein, “to
make form”). The verb, not the noun, was dominant in usage
first. There was movement involved in the act—physical,
perhaps mental, or even spiritual. A premeditated choice of
movement. The poetic choice. A choice of moving in the (non)
direction of the poetic, the non-space of captivation, creation.
A zero space. In the context of poetry, the substantive poiētēs
(poet) was long more common than the abstract noun poiēsis.
The person who chose to move in the poetic discipline, as a
discipline itself, (or perhaps poiesis chooses the person). In
sooth, the art of poetry as such was often denoted as poiētikē,
from which the discipline of poetics obtains its name.
In general usage, the verb poiein retained as primary
meaning an act of formation and transformation of matter in
the cosmic sphere in relation to time. Though ultimately, as a
social practice, it involves technē (art) and thus belongs to the
world of art. Poiēsis in the sense of making form is still present
in the language of biology and cybernetics (as in autopoiesis,
the self-generation of living organisms) or medicine (as
in hematopoiesis, the process by which bone marrow
produces red blood cells). Similarly in biology, the word
parthenogenesis: ORIGIN mid 19th cent.: modern Latin, from
Greek parthenos ‘virgin’ + genesis ‘creation.’ A virgin-creation,
a creation born from an untouched, pure being. A divine gift.
Or, a fantasized version of one—for a multitudinous array of
outcomes. The basic human need for illusion, petit plaisirs,
53
54
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part I — The Theories
ecstasies, or simple motivation to continue on—moments of
transpiercing into zero spaces—some call the sensation in
the moment of momentous events. Events force the spectator
into movement, into participation rather than spectating. The
virgin-creations as transporters. Transportation into a zero
space through the art of poetic-making.
3.1 Poet as Maker
“It is important to observe this primary sense of making form
when discussing the term poiēsis in the context of poetry
and poetics. The poet is homo faber (man, the maker) and
the poem as the made thing are commonplaces that persist
throughout the history of Western poetics, often in tension
with other formulations that identify the poet as prophet and
seer (Latin vates), as a vessel of the divine inspiration, or as the
transcendent voice of the age.”30 The parthenogenetic creator.
The divine creator who’s been created from the divine.
Especially when the complement or alternative has been
an idealist program for poetry—for instance, the Aristotelian
notion of poetry as mimesis as adapted in the European
Renaissance—“the notion of poetry as poiēsis has held an
undiminished power, perhaps because it explains what other
programs often cannot: how we encounter a poem as object,
how a poem radially alters reality, how a poem is actually
made...The history of Western poetics includes many episodes
in which idealist or even metaphysical claims for poetry are
answered (and not necessarily contradicted) by corresponding
claims that proceed from poiēsis: e.g. Philip Sydney’s fusion
30
Greene, Roland, Stephen Cushman, Clare Cavanagh, Jahan Ramazani,
Paul F. Rouzer, Harris Feinsod, David Marno, and Alexandra Slessarev. The
Princeton Encyclopedia of Poetry and Poetics. Princeton: Princeton UP, 2012.
Poïesis
55
of Platonism and Aristotelianism in his Defense of Poesy
(written ca.1580, pub. 1595) meets its counterpart in George
Puttenham’s contemporaneous Art of English Poesy (1589)
which begins with this statement: “a poet is as much to say as a
maker... A reductive but not inaccurate thesis would have it that
this tension between idealist creating and materialist making
permeates the entire history of signification of the term poiēsis.” 31
Perhaps in the context of this thesis, it is more in the condition
of making sans ideals—the creation of the collaborative poetmakers, (dēmiourgias-poetēkē), or rather: experiments in a
multiplicity of poetic makings.
In the 20th century renewed attention to poiēsis was the
outcome of a modernist hope to rid the encumbrance of
the romantic genius. Romanticism’s definition of genius as
a person driven by a force beyond his or her control and as
an ability that surpasses the natural and exceeds the human
mind makes it virtually identical with the Classical notion of
divine madness or frenzy.32 The internalized creator. Drug
taker. Naval gazer. Altered perceptual navigator. Narcissistic
word fabricator. “Modernist poetry and critics often named the
poem not as fiction, ideation, or reflection but as new reality in
itself: described the poetic act as the making of a new thing”.33
Modernists focused more on skill and ability: the objectivists—
in the spirit of Dante’s praise of Arnaut Daniel as “miglior
fabbro del parlar materno” (a better craftsman of the mother
tongue, Purgatorio 26.117), echoed in T.S. Elliot’s dedication to
the The Waste Land (1922)—celebrated the poet as the agent of
creation rather than instrument of representation.
31
Ibid.
Young, Edward. Conjectures on Original Composition: 1759. Leeds: Scolar,
1966. Print.
33
Ibid.
32
56
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part I — The Theories
Though Eliot believed, as an agent of creation making a
new thing, Others were often needed to aid in conception and
birth, “the task of creation for the poet was to discern the ‘inert
embryo...germinating in him...even though he cannot identify
this embryo until it has been transformed into an arrangement
of the right words in the right order.’ Since they possessed the
perspective provided by distance, collaborators were especially
welcome to step in and help facilitate that organizational
process.”34
Similar to Eliot’s ideas on the ‘agent of creation’ were those
of his predecessor, the poet Paul Valéry, in his early theoretical
essay “The Introduction to the Method of Leonardo Da Vinci”
(1894), “It is this that is grand. In these men there is a double
mental life, which deserves the name of method. They observe
their spontaneous perceptions which ignore internal logic, and
force themselves to mimic them, to reproduce them. They
observe the incessant flow of ideas, provoke new combinations
and look for conjectures, for relating the results.”35
Homogenerator.36
..the intellect has withdrawn its watchers from the gates, and
the ideas rush in pell-mell, and only then does it review and
inspect the multitude..
—SCHILLER
34
Badenhausen, Richard. T.S. Eliot and the Art of Collaboration. Cambridge,
U.K.: Cambridge UP, 2004. Print.
35
Valéry, Paul, and Thomas MacGreevy. Introduction to the Method of Leonardo
Da Vinci: , Translated from the French of Paul Valéry of the Académie
Française by Thomas McGreevy. London: J. Rodker, 1929. Print.
36
Schirmacher, Wolfgang, “MEDIA AESTHETICS: The Homo Generator.”
European Graduate School, Saas-Fée. Aug. 2011. Lecture.
Poïesis
57
3.2 Poiesis and Dēmiourgia
In this specific sense, one might identify in modernist
thinking something of the developing theoretical frame of
poiēsis. Its most ancient appearance in Homeric Greek (as
poiein) pertains primarily to working on matter, shape or
form and only secondarily to abstraction, whereby it might
suggest availing or producing forms. As philosophy takes
over in the classical Greek imaginary, this primary materialist
notion of poiēsis becomes degraded relative to praxis (action)
or dēmiourgia (creation). Yet is curious to account in
etymological conscientious, the root reference to dēmiourgia
bears a sort of communal influence. Demos (populous):
the masses. As opposed to poiētēs, who encounter form as
object, dēmiourgos is one whose work derives its primary
meaning from the public sphere, as the word itself shows:
dēmos + ergon. This ergon (work) covers a range of action:
a dēmiourgos can be a seer as much as a doctor. Doctor:
originally an agentive noun of the Latin verb docēre ‘to teach’.
Etymologically, there seems to blend a working together with
Others to see as much as to teach, or rather guide, as if, into the
act of poiesis itself—into the space of the creator.
“Arguably because of the Christian investment in the
notion of creation out of the absolute, but no doubt also
because of the epistemological permutations of Platonism
from the Hellenistic era onward, the referential framework
that comes to measure the genius of a poet is drawn not
from poiēsis but from dēmiourgia.”37 How easily can the poet
interact and engage the Other? The Nietzschian conflict in
37
Greene, Roland, Stephen Cushman, Clare Cavanagh, Jahan Ramazani,
Paul F. Rouzer, Harris Feinsod, David Marno, and Alexandra Slessarev. The
Princeton Encyclopedia of Poetry and Poetics. Princeton: Princeton UP, 2012.
Print.
58
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part I — The Theories
Birth of Tradgedy begins here, perhaps, when Apollonians take
over as creative force.
The chameleon-like poet flutters alongside the
land, crossing seas, color-shifting in the spectrum of
populous. The Deleuzian schizophrenic-poet, is not
schizophrenic—they know when they change colors,
transform, there is a conscious transformation, unlike the
schizophrenic-unconscious of the shifts. (An unintentional
misunderstanding perhaps). In the overwhelming spectrum
of all the colors there is also black and white, both are zero
spaces. There is seen an equal amount of darkness as light,
both can be equally blinding. Solitude. What is needed now
is both Apollonian and Dyonisian collaborators waiting up at
the surface with open eyes, ears and arms—community and
collaboration. In this sense, the chaos of experience would be
instantly released and as such, not felt or seen as a madness,
but a normal experience in the creative process.
And Something’s odd – within That person that I was And this One – do not feel the same Could it be Madness – this?
—Emily Dickinson 1830 – 1886
In his work, Stephen K. Levine recognizes this experience
as common to most primitive cultures, of which we all
essentially originated, in the role of the archetype healer.
“Shaman are the prototype of the artist as therapist. They are
masters of ceremonies who employ diverse media for healing
purposes. Their healing is accomplished by a journey to the
other world, the world of the spirits or gods. The journey is
perilous, since they may lose their own souls in the process and
be unable to return. Only their inherence in the community
ensures they will have a home to return to.38
38
Levine, Stephen K. Poiesis: The Language of Psychology and the Speech of the
Soul. London: Jessica Kingsley Pub., 1997. Print.
Poïesis
59
Relating back to the notions of Plato, “one might say
(though in Timaeus both notions are intertwined) that
dēmiourgos is still in effect a worker who commits an ergon,
even if this ergon is the universe itself, while the poet is the
shaper who shapes forms.”39 —which may be opined as his
distinction between the philosopher and the poet. Because
for Plato, “shaping forms is, in the last instance, inevitably
misshaping, de-forming—hence, his alarm for the poet as
a shaper who transforms morals, essentially a political, not
ethical, act that leaves no place for the poet but exile from the
city.”40 Do I dare disturb the universe.41
3.3 Poiesis’ Relationship with
Creation, Destruction and
Metamorphosis
Plato’s review is summoned from the perspective of what
will become the philosophical (and later, theological) desire
to mobilize a non-destructible, absolute truth. As poiesis is
making, there involves the notion of carving, which in turn
is a form of reshaping; thus, to form is always to transform,
realized, in a materialist way, as the process of bringing
otherness to bear on the world, as opposed to receiving
otherness as external authority. Hence, eradicating the absolute
authority which Plato, not unlike Hitler, sought.
In this respect, inherent in the infinitive poiein is also an
element of destruction, and there is no external guarantee that
would absolve any poiēsis of the destructive elements of the
alteration it performs. In response to this one might consider
that a better word for destruction would be metamorphosis.
39
Ibid.
Ibid.
41
Eliot, T. S. The Love Song of J. Alfred Prufrock. New York: Ameron, 1930.
Print.
40
60
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part I — The Theories
In that case, Martin Heidegger seemed to be moving in the
right conceptual direction in his philosophical striving to
find it in his threshold occasion42: a moment of “ecstasis” when
something moves away from its standing as one thing to
become another. Though in nothing and infinity, (zero space),
‘ecstasy’ simply doesn’t equate in any etymological sense. In a
zero space, there is only that, nothing and infinity. Emotion no
longer exists. Nor desire. Nor almost anything, within the poet.
There is simply stasis, almost no movement, grey matter, the
poet’s frequency is reduced to a state beyond thinking, simply
observing, in a suspension of judgment. It’s a pre-creative
space, a temporal visit where nothing happens, nothing and
infinity; everything happening in the cosmos can exist in these
spatial vibrations encountered through the interceptions of
the receiver—and only when one comes back to conscious
presence may the creator have the potential to give birth or fine
tune a creation. Though there is insurmountable documented
evidence in the annals of history concluding many have missed
the opportunity, and as well turned to anesthetics of sorts,
even committed suicide—as each experience can be both
overwhelming and frightening. Yet, one may potentially not
recognize that something had taken place to begin with—the
body reacting before mind. Possibly, it is the more disciplined
mind that can identify the observation and capture and
transmit it before it disintegrates into the distance.
The journey is perilous, since they may lose their own souls
in the process and be unable to return.
—Stephen K. Levine
It is at the moment of coming back to conscious presence
when the creator may have the potential to experience a
42
Heidegger, Martin. Being and Time. New York: Harper, 1962. Print.
Poïesis
61
kind of metamorphosis, and her/his creation can simply be
born. There is no real ‘thinking’ that takes place during the
process of birth—it is more a natural primitive reaction to the
experience itself, a pure being-in-the-moment, just as in child
birth. Though it is important to note that most philosophers
are male, hence, unable to encounter a primary physical/
mental/spiritual intensity in the experience of pregnancy and
event of childbirth and thus only capable of writing, even
metaphorically about it without any precision. Nevertheless,
the philosopher Husserl comes closest with his conceptual
zero point of orientation: the region of pure consciousness.
You can’t “go there” with consciousness; instead you have to
let the worldly go away and then inhabit what’s left. “What can
remain, if the whole world, including ourselves with all our
cogitare, is excluded?” 43
However what seems ironic or even peculiar about the
historical search for comprehension of the aesthetic-creativepoetic-experience, is the fact that the philosophers have been
at each others throats desperate to exact the experience in
the sacred land of ‘zero spaces’ for millennia—while at the
same time, the poetic-creators have been riding the waves out,
surfing, crashing, toppling on their heads and getting back up
to do it again for just as long.
43
Husserl, Edmund, and Donn Welton. The Essential Husserl: Basic Writings in
Transcendental Phenomenology. Bloomington, IN: Indiana UP, 1999. Print.
62
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part I — The Theories
3.4 Poiesis and Plato’s Nature of Eros
Poiein, as both creative and destructive action, is sustained by
the modernist persuasion. The grapple between what is called
“private” and “public” poetics has not resolved, historically, the
social orders presented by the idea of the poet as a shaper of
forms. Staggeringly dragged out, the impact of Plato’s political
bias has been crucial in the development of modernity. Debates
of the Platonic significance of the term poiēsis often regulate
themselves to its principal conjuration in the Symposium,
where the conviction is imbued with diverse configurations of
Eros.
In the Symposium section 207d of The Nature of Eros,
Diotima describes how mortals strive for immortality. The
death instinct. In all begetting and bringing forth upon the
beautiful there is a kind of making or poiesis . In this genesis
there is a movement beyond the temporal cycle of birth and
decay. According to Plato, such a movement can occur in three
kinds of poiesis: (1) Natural poiesis through sexual procreation,
(2) poiesis in the city through the attainment of heroic fame
and finally, (3) poiesis in the soul through the cultivation of
virtue and knowledge.44
This love of wisdom, (cultivation of virtue and
knowledge), when connected with the activity of Eros, strives
to grasp the beautiful in a manner far beyond the previous
stages. It is not concerned with any earthly manifestation of
beauty, whether this be in bodies, souls or science, but rather
the nature of the Beautiful Itself. This is the final goal of erotic
activity (210e).
44
Cavalier, Robert. Symposium Outline. The Nature of Eros. Carnegie Mellon
University, n.d. Web. 17 Feb. 2014.
Poïesis
63
—And in fact artistic experience lies so incredibly close
to that of sex, to its pain and its ecstasy, that the two
manifestations are indeed but different forms of one and the
same yearning and delight...his poetic power is great, strong
as a primitive instinct; it has its own unyielding rhythms in
itself and breaks out of him as out of mountains.
—Rainer Maria Rilke, Letter Three, Viareggio, near Pisa
(Italy) April 23, 1903
If sex weren’t pleasurable, as a species we would have
no drive to procreate. Hence, it is only logical, that whatever
drives us to the places of creative inspiration, demands allure
with just as much persuasion—but once in, conception,
gestation and then giving birth, there is equal transformation,
discomfort and pain. No pain, no gain. A simplistic aphorism.
But unless one is sadomasochistic, it seems illogical to qualify
it as the final goal of erotic activity. While Plato had numerous
laudable conceptual ideas used as a base/foundation even for
many contemporary philosophers still, perhaps he was off the
mark in his assessment of this third realm of poiesis.
Most prominent in history, artists attempt but are
unsuccessful in resisting the calling. Many are thus compelled
to numb their senses during these forced responses by
anesthetizing the failed resistance and “going in” without
sobriety, or rather clarity. Hence, our exemplary history
of drug/alcohol addicted literati. Forsaking one’s creative
compulsion may be recognized in Lacanian spheres as corking
the unconscious stream of signifiers, though I would go further
and say awareness of signifiers are experienced only at the
first level of passing through when entering and coming
out of a zero space. Once in a zero space, the personal is no
longer—it is nothing and infinity, at that depth personal is so
meshed with everything it would no longer be recognizable,
64
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part I — The Theories
or more, the personal is eradicated. Whether this gesture of
corking is done in an unconscious or conscious mode, or
why one might consciously cork their own well-source of
inspirational unconscious flow is debatable. In either case this
will eventually lead to a bursting out of the bottle, geyser style:
spreading selves round the environment to be witnessed by the
others in chaotic/erratic form(s). Repression is not sustainable.
(Hence, our exemplary history which has likened many poetic
temperaments to divine madness for some 3000 years.) It also
will and can be allayed temporarily with additives filling in
the gap—the external imaginary object a, perhaps is a form
of those additives, which can multiply or vary in intensity
according to said subjects satisfaction and/or appreciation
with its environment and sociological/economical/ domicile
comfort level. Running the gambit of appropriated addictions
and obsessions from sexual, drug, material, speech, food,
travel and so on and forth; anything to try and prevent the
cork from bursting. Anything to prevent one from facing their
own music—following the pied piper down the lane into an
unfamiliar zero space. Perhaps this is where the pathology
of mania resides so often—fully forced resistance. And
therein lies the paradox of the zero space(s) conundrum—the
philosophers lust after experiencing it, while the poets, at
certain points in their lives, get entirely fed up with the curse of
the repeated experience altogether. Perhaps it’s time to level the
playing field, and consider collaboration?
Plato’s stages of the ascent have allowed a bringing forth
upon the beautiful (qua means) which eventually leads to
a transcendent gasp of the Beautiful Itself (qua end). It is
here that we have arrived at the Forms, (inspirational poetic
creations), for we are comprehending the idea of the Beautiful
Poïesis
65
(212a).45 Despite Plato’s belief of one being able to comprehend
the idea of the beautiful in this place, (an idealized illusion) the
poet Rilke chimes in,
With nothing can one approach a work of art so little as
with critical words: they always come down to a more
or less happy misunderstanding. Things are not all so
comprehensible and expressible as one would mostly have
us believe; most events are inexpressible, taking place
in a realm which no word has ever entered, and more
inexpressible than all else are works of art, mysterious
existences, the life of which, while ours passes away, endures.
—Rainer Maria RILKE, Letter One, Paris, February 17th,
1903
Diotima describes the nature of this Form as ever existent,
neither coming into being nor passing out of being, hence
beyond the world of Change and Becoming (211a). It is eternal
and timeless, self-subsistent and independent (211b). It is that
which “in-forms” all particular instances of beauty while
remaining distinct from those instances (211b).46
...taking place in a realm which no word has ever entered,
and more inexpressible than all else are works of art,
mysterious existences, the life of which, while ours passes
away, endures.
—Rainer Maria RILKE
“Thus through the intellectual contemplation of the
Beautiful itself one can, according to Plato, as far as is granted
to mortals, participate in an “immortal realm” and achieve that
highest good afforded to man(212a)”.47
45
Cavalier, Robert. Symposium Outline. The Nature of Eros. Carnegie Mellon
University, n.d. Web. 17 Feb. 2014.
46
Ibid.
47
Ibid.
66
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part I — The Theories
Perhaps in modern day this would fall under the realm
of dramatized narcissism? There was another man in history
who believed he knew what the highest good afforded to man
was, his name was Adolf Hitler, and we know what results from
this way of thinking. In the technological media age if mass
genocide and socio-pathological torture and murder is one’s
game, then claiming to know the highest good afforded to man
should be a clear indication to evacuate. After all, “to a limited
being it’s limited understanding is not felt to be a limitation”,
said Ludwig Feuerbach before influencing Nietzsche. Socrates
completes his recollection and concludes by telling Phaedrus
and the others that Eros is mankind’s greatest helper insofar as
careful attention to erotic activity can lead us upwards to the
realm of the Forms (212b).48
So let’s recap, we concur that creative and sexual energy
are potentially born from the same force, and as such drive the
primitive desire to create despite all obstacles that may stand
in the way of the maddening poetic spirit. The underlying
question is: did Plato really have the power in him to take
himself with his ‘intellectual contemplation’ to that next
“immortal realm” and balance the forces? He does after all
recount,
For the authors of those great poems which we admire, do
not attain to excellence through the rules of any art; but
they utter their beautiful melodies of verse in a state of
inspiration, and, as it were, possessed by a spirit not their
own.
Note that the beautiful, as it is used here, refers to the
sensible manifestation of the beautiful itself. It is upon this
48
Ibid.
Poïesis
67
mode of presentation that Eros engenders and begets. As such,
the beautiful here acts as a medium for erotic activity. But,
as we have seen this mode of presentation contains within
itself a provocation beyond itself insofar as it is the visible
manifestation of the eidos (essence) of the Beautiful. This
indicates that the end (purpose, goal) of erotic activity is to
gaze upon and intellectually possess the Beautiful qua Form.
Thus, the ultimate goal of the activity of Eros is a transcendent
“possession” of the eidos of Beauty (of 210e-211d) but the
means toward this involves an engendering upon the visible
modes of beauty.”49 And then Plato proceeds to exile the poets
from the city.
Perhaps we might consider for a moment Plato in
the archetype personality of the obsessive-compulsive in
contemporary day: neuro-biological evidence indicates that
sentiments of love decreases brain levels of serotonin, the
neurotransmitter responsible for mood and flexibility. Low
serotonin means you can get stuck on ideas—you become
obsessed. In extreme cases, the serotonin shortage can trigger
obsessive behaviors, such as exhibiting extreme jealousy. We
probe further into this analysis by taking a closer look at the
Interlude between Socrates and Agathon (198 –201c), before he
proceeds to the the effects of eros. Here we are informed “love
is neither the possession of the beautiful nor the possession of
the good but involves rather a striving for that which it lacks”.
Poor Plato. He lacked the power to enter a ‘state of inspiration’
in which he himself could be ‘possessed of a spirit not his own’
in order to come out of it creating beautiful melodies and
poetry, or any art for that matter. Merely thoughts. Could it be
that this lack led to his very own definition of love—striving
49
Plato. “Symposium.” Symposium. N.p., n.d. Web. 17 Feb. 2014.
68
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part I — The Theories
for that which it lacks? As he became more and more obsessed
with the conceptual idea in the third realm of poiesis, (the
after zero space where creative inspiration is conceived), and
perhaps compulsively jealous and frustrated in his ‘intellectual
contemplation’ of knowing this unforeseen space must exist,
yet unable to experience it firsthand—hence, the exile of the
poets, his unrequited love. Plato’s pharmakoi.50
Love is madness; if thwarted it develops fast
—Mark Twain
As specified by Plato in his Symposium, the ultimate
power of poiēsis consists not in the shaping of form or even the
erotic creation and production of life but in the transformation
of the soul by virtue of philosophical practice. In his usurpation
of poiēsis, philosophy defeats poetry. But was poetry ever itself
in a competition with philosophy to begin with? If the poets
had to live under such stringent mind control, would there
have even been poetic creations in the history of humankind?
But most importantly, if the poets were given the choice—
would they even want the ability to experience the perpetual
intensities and zero spaces?
3.5 Poiesis and Giambattista Vico
It is not so difficult to believe, in the long march of Western
thought, whereby the squabble between poetry and
philosophy is persistently conducted, the promoters of poiēsis
as material (trans)formation are those who object to the
seductions of Platonism and its (l)imitations. Scarcely any,
50
Derrida, Jaques. “Plato’s Pharmacy.” Tel Quel (1968): Print.
Poïesis
69
however, explicitly name poiēsis as such to the matrix of their
philosophical quest. Giambattaista Vico would indubitably be
one such theorist, whose Scienza nuova (New Science 1725)
expands the Renaissance interpretation of poiēsis beyond the
task of imitatio natura (imitation of nature, or mimesis) and
admittedly launches the thinking of history as a poetic venture.
He believed “to comprehend fully the reality of the past, we
must participate in the process whereby individuals, peoples,
and entire cultures and societies figured their futures through
imaginative projections of their wills.”51 Furthermore, poetic
histories cause us “to rethink the past and reconsider what we
might plan for the future”52. The poetic visionaries.
Giambattista Vico believed that the key to understanding
our past was through metaphorical speech, which he called
Poetic Wisdom. Faithful to the philological methodology, he
espies that, “for the Latins, verum (the true) and factum (what
is made) are interchangeable.”53 This prompts him to articulate
how the ancient sages reached a vital awareness that humans
had strayed from maintaining—predominantly that, “the true
is precisely what is made”.54 Hence, we as humans make our
own truths—what we do not make, we cannot truly know.
If we were to accept this statement in the first degree, one
might consider that a bit of humility when encountering the
Others, might go along way—if, of course, at any time, we
would like to experience the closest form of alterity—that is:
we did not make the Other, (unless they are our children, and
51
Price, David W. History Made, History Imagined: Contemporary Literature,
Poiesis, and the past. Urbana: University of Illinois, 1999. Print.
52
Ibid.
53
Vico, Giambattista, Jason Taylor, and Robert C. Miner. On the Most Ancient
Wisdom of the Italians: Drawn out from the Origins of the Latin Language. New
Haven, CT: Yale UP, 2010. Print.
54
Ibid.
70
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part I — The Theories
even so), so to try and understand them, would require pure
observations, (poet), interactions,(dramatist), compassion,
(theologian), suspended judgement, (rarely anyone outside of
zero space) and vulnerable receptivity, (all the poets), to arrive
at a Poetists role in representing character in as true to form as
possible.
A further visual example of this philological method
is offered when Vico uses money and the image of coins to
discuss the origin of language, arguing that the earliest Gentile
nations, “expressed themselves by gestures”, “used signs to fix
the boundaries of their estates”, and “made use of money”.55
By establishing this, Vico moves on to claim that naming,
money and the law all stem from the same Greek root nomos,
signifying law, and from it we get nomisma, (money). Vico
continues in detail through his text to approach history in
such a manner as he discloses his entire philosophical project
as an effort to replace a “rational metaphysics with a poetic
metaphysics based on metaphoric saturation”.56 Hence, myth as
poiesis.
“The criterion and rule of the true is to have made it.
Accordingly, our clear and distinct idea of the mind cannot be
a criterion of the mind itself, still less of other truths. For while
the mind perceives itself, it does not make itself.”57 Thus, history,
according to Vico, is really a form of poiesis, the act of making in
language. Vico believes history is a narrative constructed in the
minds by those who think the past, thus we experience human
history through the memory of poetic imaginations, “Memory is
the same as imagination, which for that reason is called memoria
Vico, Giambattista, and Thomas Goddard Bergin. The New Science. __.
Ithaca: Cornell UP, 1948. Print.
56
Price, David W. History Made, History Imagined: Contemporary Literature,
Poiesis, and the past. Urbana: University of Illinois, 1999. Print.
57
Vico, Giambattista, and Thomas Goddard Bergin. The New Science. __.
Ithaca: Cornell UP, 1948. Print.
55
Poïesis
71
in Latin...Memory thus has three different elements: memory
when it remembers things, imagination when it alters or imitates
them, and invention when it gives them a new turn or puts
them into proper arrangement and relationship.”58 These three
elements—memoria, fantasia, and ingegno—comprise memory
as a whole, which, Vico asserts, “is the same as imagination”59
The act of naming, the metaphoric enterprise par excellence,
he says, involves the construction of an imaginative universal
(universale fantastico), which he claims is the key to The New
Science.
For Vico, there does not exist an antecedent “empirical
or historical order of events...(that the poetic mind)..rendered
into fabulous form. They (events themselves) are given form
through fables.”60 It is the poetic, primitive mind that gives
shape to events; without such arranging, experience continues
as incoherent. A dreamscape. Vico is convinced that all of
civilization becomes visible from this inceptive poetic act:
transcribing, organizing, adapting the irrational dreamscape
of past experiences into rational, coherent form. Synthesizing
similar experiences of Others into discourse of a common
purpose. “The institutions of religion, marriage, burial,
forms of state—in short, all cultural institutions—grow out
of metaphoric saturation effected by imaginative universals
that in and of themselves are fables. These fables, stories,
and metaphors make up the sensus communis, the linguistic
and semiotic network that connects people within a given
culture: through these acts which (Hayden) White calls acts
of metaphorical projection, the human world comes to be.
Vico’s understanding of this process, White argues, led him to
58
Ibid.
Ibid.
60
Verene, Donald P. Vico’s Science of Imagination. Ithaca: Cornell UP, 1981.
Print.
59
72
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part I — The Theories
conceive of the fictive as the third ground between truth and
fable that we properly see as being opposed to one another.”61
“While it is difficult to speak of Vico’s direct philosophical
descendants, in retrospect, a vast trajectory of strains of
thought either in avant-garde poetics (from the 19th century
on) or political aesthetics (especially heterodox tendencies
unfolding out of Hegelian Marxism) engages with similar
views of history as poiēsis.”62
I’m not saying that Resnais, and Prigogine, or Godard, and
Thom are doing the same thing. I’m pointing out, rather,
that there are remarkable similarities between scientific
creators of functions and cinematic creators of images. And
the same goes for philosophical concepts, since there are
distinct concepts of these spaces.
—Alan SOKAL
One such descendent may be noted in Nietzsche’s edict
when he applies the coin representation to communicate to
us that truth is metaphorical—or rather, that truth is a lie.
Truths, he declares, “are metaphors that have become worn
out and have been drained of sensuous force, coins that have
lost their embossing and are now considered as metal and no
longer coins”.63 Furthermore, he writes, “The drive towards the
formation of metaphors is the fundamental human drive which
one cannot for a single instance dispense with in thought, for
61
Price, David W. History Made, History Imagined: Contemporary Literature,
Poiesis, and the past. Urbana: University of Illinois, 1999. Print.
62
Greene, Roland, Stephen Cushman, Clare Cavanagh, Jahan Ramazani,
Paul F. Rouzer, Harris Feinsod, David Marno, and Alexandra Slessarev. The
Princeton Encyclopedia of Poetry and Poetics. Princeton: Princeton UP, 2012.
Print.
63
Nietzsche, Friedrich Wilhelm, and Daniel Breazeale. Philosophy and Truth:
Selections from Nietzsche’s Notebooks of the Early 1870’s. Atlantic Highlands, NJ:
Humanities, 1979. Print.
Poïesis
73
one would thereby dispense with man himself.”64 In Beyond
Good and Evil he presents the following question: “Why
couldn’t the world that concerns us—be a fiction?”
Heidegger, as well, so it seems, in his original conception
of Being is nothing short of a restatement of Vico, or Heidegger
recapitulating Nietzsche reiterating Vico. Being, in early
Heidegger, is “that on the basis of which beings are already
understood.” According to him one might say that the
understanding of being is the style of life manifest in the way
everyday practices are coordinated. “A culture’s understanding
of being allows people and things to show up as something
— people show up as heroes in Greece and as Saints in the
Middle Ages, for example, and things for the Homeric Greeks
were flashing up to be admired, while for Christians they
were creatures to be mastered and interpreted. Put generally,
the shared practices into which we are socialized provide a
background understanding of what counts as things, what
counts as human beings and what it makes sense to do, on the
basis of which we can direct our actions towards particular
things and people. Thus the understanding of being creates
what Heidegger calls a clearing (Lichtung). Heidegger calls
the unnoticed way that the clearing both limits and opens
up what can show up and what can be done, its “unobtrusive
governance (Waltens).”65
With the exception of his new concept of “the clearing”
it sound like an echo: Vico is convinced that all of civilization
becomes visible from this inceptive poetic act: transcribing,
organizing, adapting the irrational dreamscape of past
64
Ibid.
Dreyfus, Hubert L. “Being and Power: Heidegger and Foucault.” University
of Berkeley Philosophy Department. Regents of the University of Berkeley,
2004. Web. 25 Feb. 2014.
65
74
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part I — The Theories
experiences into rational, coherent form. Synthesizing similar
experiences of Others into discourse of a common purpose. “The
institutions of religion, marriage, burial, forms of state—in short,
all cultural institutions—grow out of metaphoric saturation
effected by imaginative universals that in and of themselves are
fables. These fables, stories, and metaphors make up the sensus
communis, the linguistic and semiotic network that connects
people within a given culture: through these acts which (Hayden)
White calls acts of metaphorical projection, the human world
comes to be.
Without going too far off topic, it is perhaps important to
link in this string of Vico’s descendants with one more important
philosopher and his concept of power (that could be interesting
for a further investigation elsewhere), Michel Foucault. While
Heidegger’s clearing could easily be linked as a naming of the
moment or place where Vico’s notion of universale fantastico
takes place, (the act of naming, the metaphoric enterprise par
excellence, he says, involves the construction of an imaginative
universal), his clearing both limits and opens up what can show
up and what can be done. For a philosopher who believes in
thinking as poiesis (see the section on Heidegger), there would
be a limit in this space, because a zero space had not been
reached prior. For the sake of this study, we would call his
clearing, the moment after a zero space, (when thinking and
contemplation can occur—for in the zero space, let us not forget,
there is only nothing and infinity).
“According to Foucault, power has suffered a parallel
misunderstanding as Heidegger’s clearing. In general, many of
Foucault’s difficult remarks concerning power make sense if we
take him to be getting at a social clearing with an emphasis on
the way the everyday practices of individuals and groups are
coordinated so as to produce, perpetuate, and delimit what people
Poïesis
75
can think, do and be. For Foucault, power, like Heidegger’s being,
is no fixed entity or institution, but is incarnated in historical
social practices.”66 “One needs to be nominalistic,” (as Vico tells
us we do in universale fantastico-we name the social practice),
Foucault tells us, “power is not an institution, and not a structure;
neither is it a certain strength we are endowed with; it is the
name that one attributes to a complex strategical situation in
a particular society.”67 Here, history as poiesis moves on to the
political. Through the collective gathering of forces (poetic
geniuses) who are flexible enough to move, (movement), bend
and dabble with resilience in Poetic Wisdom or in balancing the
Nietzschean DNA, (Dionysian and Apollonian), can we arrive at
a certain sense of Foucauldian power?
3.6 Poïesis with Martin Heidegger
and Henri Bergson
Of all contemporary philosophical engagements with poiēsis,
respectively, Martin Heidegger’s experience seems to remain
most prominent. Heidegger claimed to discover the original
concept of poiēsis in a large extent through his return to the
Pre-Socratics, (reminiscent of the philological method of
Vico and Nietzsche, et al. ). In Heidegger’s work, poiēsis is
eventually invoked as the overcoming of the ancient squabble
between philosophy and poetry by attempting to elucidate
the original relationship between poiesis and noein (thinking).
Poïesis then becomes the activity or occurrence through which
the world is transformed and continued either through poetical
creations or philosophical thinking.
66
Dreyfus, Hubert L. “Being and Power: Heidegger and Foucault.” University
of Berkeley Philosophy Department. Regents of the University of Berkeley,
2004. Web. 25 Feb. 2014.
67
Foucault, Michel, and James D. Faubion. Power. New York: New, 2000. Print.
76
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part I — The Theories
“Whereas philosophical thinking is explicitly concerned
with the sense of Being, original poetry, while implicitly
concerned with the sense of Being, does not make the issue
thematic.”68 Poïesis, for Heidegger, is not technical production
or creative genius but the reconciliation between thinking
matters and ‘a fundamental horizon of reality’. Poiesis
becomes a site of ‘disclosure’ (A-letheia) of Being “which is
conceptually broader than, and so can assume the modality
of, either philosophical or poetical discourse. Otherwise put:
the concept of poiesis furnishes the analogical unity, (the
conceptual native birthplace of an original production) of the
poet and philosopher”69. In fact, poiesis as a space, where both
the poet and philosopher can enter as a conceptual place laden
with a well-spring of creative Ideas or Thoughts. “Higher than
actuality stands possibility.”70
However, if poiesis is defined in these Heideggerean
terms as a conceptual birth place for both creative Ideas and
Thinking, then poiesis as a concept is not understood as a
zero space, but rather, the space that comes after a zero space,
the birth, not the gestation. For when one enters a zero space,
there is simply no thinking what-so-ever. As stated earlier: a
zero space is a pre-creative space, a non-temporal visit where
nothing happens, nothing and infinity, everything happening
in the cosmos exists in these spatial vibrations encountered
through the vibration of the receiver—and only when one
comes back to conscious presence may the creator have the
potential to give birth—produce and fine tune a creation.
Heidegger, however, while not explicitly saying so, may
68
Alexander Ferrari Di Pippo. The Concept of Poiesis in Heidegger’s An
Introduction to Metaphysics. In: Thinking Fundamentals, IWM Junior Visiting
Fellows Conferences, Vol. 9: Vienna 2000
69
Ibid.
70
Heidegger, Martin. Being and Time. New York: Harper, 1962. Print.
Poïesis
77
have recognized this: in his Poetry, Language, and Thought,
and in particular the essay entitled “The Origin of the Work
of Art”. Here Heidegger describes the value of the work of art
as a means to open a “clearing” for the appearance of things
in the world, or to ‘disclose’ their meaning for human beings.
This ‘clearing’ is related to his concept of Aletheia, which as
mentioned earlier is ‘disclosure’ or ‘unconcealment’. What he fails
to point out in his work is the original word for ‘mysticism’ is
derived from the Greek μυω, meaning “I conceal”. In fact, what
it seems Heidegger has done is taken the original Greek word
for ‘mysticism’ and ‘de-mystified’ it by bringing it to a surface
where it can be revealed through a work of art. Because of its
variable meanings, even in serious treatments, any definition
of ‘mystical experience’ must be at least partly speculative. 71
As such, speculation being defined as something that is merely
asserted in an ad hoc fashion rather than following logically
from general principles would demand ridicule and disrespect
in his strict discipline. Heidegger couldn’t conceivably include
a mere assertion in place of a logic in his philosophy. Defined
as ‘a theory or attitude held by a person or organization that
acts as a guiding principle for behavior’, philosophy as guide
cannot be built on mere assertions. So he eliminates the before
of the ‘un-concealment’, while alluding to it by covertly naming
it the place of de-mystification. In this sense, he may have very
well realized a conceptual existence of the place we call a zero
space after-all. But it was certainly not a place both the poet and
philosopher could go, nor one he could with any serious respect
in the discipline discuss directly in the philosophical discourse.
Perchance he knew it was a place where the philosopher could
Gellman, Jerome, “Mysticism”, The Stanford Encyclopedia of Philosophy
(Summer 2011 Edition, Edward N. Zalta (ed.) Plato.stanford.edu. Retrieved
2014-02-26.
71
78
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part I — The Theories
potentially help the artist clarify and precise through language,
after the experience was had. Conceivably that is where he
meant philosophy and poetry become united. (And it doesn’t
seem to be too conceptually distant from Nietzche’s DNA
marriage.)
The most beautiful things are those that madness prompts
and reason writes.
—Andre Gide 1869-1951
Perhaps, there is more insight in this troubling
relationship between Heidegger’s notion of poiesis and
the ‘pre-poiesis zero space(s)’ to which this research
conceptualizes, as inadvertently observed by Nietzsche in his
Birth of Tragedy. Nietzsche states that the poet observes and the
dramatist engages the Others while observing:
...physiological phenomena between which we can observe
an opposition ... My friend , that is precisely the poet’s
work — To figure out his dreams, mark them down... to
speak out from other bodies and souls, then that person is a
dramatist...
and
...if someone just possesses the capacity to see a living game
going on and to live all the time surrounded by hordes of
ghosts, then that man is a poet. If someone just feels the urge
to change himself and to speak out from other bodies and
souls, then that person is a dramatist.72
In both of the passages, it is evident that in order to
create in the act of poiesis, to be both poet and dramatist
72
Nietzsche, Friedrich Wilhelm, Oscar Levy, and Robert Guppy. “The Birth
of Tragedy.” Complete Works. The First Complete and Authorized English
Translation. New York: Russell & Russell, 1964. N. pag. Print.
Poïesis
79
(what we will nominate as a Poetist), we must face the Other,
autrui with a detachment that can only be learned in facing
the fear of potential suffering we know Others may transmit.
Yet at the same time, within a certain detachment, one must
still maintain the capacity to experience the intensity of the
Other(s), without letting it personally affect oneself—a sort of
d(a)ttachment. The in-between de/a to tach(e)ment. As if: the
stain (tache) must be made without resisting a trace, and yet,
one must learn how to clean out the stain in the aftermath, less
it befoul the Being. No one can cause us suffering if we learn
to both observe, engage and cleanse thoroughly. Confidence
and strength within the vulnerability. ORIGIN early 17th cent.:
from late Latin vulnerabilis, from Latin vulnerare ‘to wound,’
from vulnus ‘wound.’. We cannot be wounded if we envision our
center as a metaphorical rock. The rock can absorb all weather
and climate while remaining itself. Emotional intelligence
and near alterity can only be learned by facing our fear of
experiencing the Others, throwing ourselves into the sharks,
courage, steady breathing—aware of the transformative process
going on within us, aware of the Others transformative energies.
Knowing we can return to our Being un-befouled rock at any
given moment by the simple click of our imaginations, it is the
experience of humanity we seek. To detach while both observing
the process within as well as within the other, emotions can
present themselves sans will, fear of them is eliminated, they
cannot dominate, they will pass. If we resist them, they stay for
awhile, just as the opponent works harder in the game when
competition puts up a fight—once you surrender, the opponents
get bored and move on. No action is the best action.73
We must consider the advantageous results of not only
exploring and precis-ing ‘the poets’ space but equally, the
73
Schirmacher, Wolfgang, “PARALLEL ETHICS” European Graduate School,
Saas-Fée. Aug. 2011. Lecture.
80
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part I — The Theories
dramatist’s place of entry. That is, their capacity to willingly
and quite naturally attempt experiencing alterity: to speak from
other bodies/souls in a multiple phenomenological experience.
To understand reactions to them without being attached to
those reactions. Perhaps if the many could practice performing
this task as a standard core in education, the world might very
well eventually one day find peace. However, it would be no
easy task—no action is also the most complicated reaction.
Showing no action as the emotional disruptions run through
you, breaks limits within the self and leaves the witness that
much closer to surviving repeated zero space(s), the ethical
comfort zone, quotidian, no matter which Other is nearby.
Introspection and Outer-spection, resting in the ethical home74,
no matter where you are.
Already in the Introduction to Metaphysics, 1936,
Heidegger forwards what will eventually become the central
focus of his work: poetry is thought itself (dichten ist denken),
and thereby all philosophical thinking is truly poetic and vice
versa. Even if one can trace theological elements in Heidegger’s
invocation of poiēsis as radical creation, his gesture does, in
part, return to the radical poiein its radical formative force.
But just like the Platonic/Socratic notions Heidegger
was attempting to bypass, he too, gets stuck in remaining at
the threshold without leaping. The Kierkegaardean leap of
faith. As mentioned earlier in the Platonic analysis, there is
no comprehending in the nature of the Beautiful, nor is there
thinking in the pre-act of poiesis, or in order for poiesis to
occur— in zero space(s), pre-creative birth, there is neither
comprehending, nor thinking. Heidegger, while attempting to
move beyond Platonic description of poiesis, seems to get caught
74
Ibid.
Poïesis
81
in the same trap. Though he thoughtfully tries not to relegate
poetry to an inferior form than philosophy, as Plato did, and
attempts to plant poet and philosopher on equal ground, he too,
seems to miss the mark in his description of the complete before
and after in poiesis. The curious mystery is whether he was
intentionally evasive? Was he writing with the poets’ best interest
in mind, or was he writing for himself? And just what was it that
he and Paul Celan discussed out there in the black forest?
From here, we will determine that zero space(s) are not
poiesis, but rather pre-poiesis, the before and yet, sometimes
during, the making. It is neither a place of comprehension,
nor thinking, and never was, or will it be, in any sort of
competition with philosophy. It simply is un-nameable, that’s
why it is zero—there is no description for it, as a non-nominal
space it isn’t anything—nothing and infinity.
But Heidegger does return to the radical poiein its radical
formative force. This force resonates in discourses of modernity,
both aesthetic and political. According to philosophers an entire
society can be said to engage in poiēsis in its radical moments of
self-determination, (see Foucault’s power concept). In this sense,
and bearing reference to Vico, poiēsis can be linked to history in
the making. In The Basic Problems of Phenomenology, Heidegger
acknowledges that “Because the Dasein is historical in its own
existence, possibilities of access and modes of interpretation
of beings are themselves diverse, varying in different historical
circumstances.” But he adds that “it is for this reason that there
necessarily belongs to the conceptual determination of being and
its structures...a destruction— a critical process in which the
traditional concepts...are destructed down to the sources from
which they were drawn. Only by means of this destruction can
ontology fully assure itself in a phenomenological way of the
genuine character of its concepts.”75
75
Heidegger, Martin. The Basic Problems of Phenomenology. Bloomington:
Indiana UP, 1982. Print.
82
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part I — The Theories
“This (historical) making cannot be said to have a precise
temporality; hence, traditional methods of historiography
cannot grasp it. Its working is a perpetual re-working that
would not spare even itself as an object of that work. (The
commonplace notion of a poem always being at work on itself,
on making itself into a poem, should be understood here as
an elemental force of poiēsis.) The duration of shaping matter
into form, as Henri Bergson would have it, occurs in, (or as)
a radical present. This is a paradoxical condition, which is
why its boundaries exceed the capacity of both narration and
symbolization and can only be grasped in a performative vein.
The energy of poiēsis is dramatic: literally, to form is to make
form happen, to change form—including one’s own. The
social and political substance of poiēsis is thus signified not
only by its constitutively transformative power, which would
be a mere abstraction, but by the fact that, since its ancient
Greek meaning, it pertains to humanity’s immanent (even if
perpetually self-altering) encounter with the world.” 76
Duration, as elucidated by Bergson, is both a homogeneity
and heterogeneity, a composition from similar parts and a
composition from dissimilar parts, the one and the many,
unity and multiplicity, constantly in movement, moving,
transforming, changing shape and consistency, dancing—just
like the human mind—but, being mobile, flexible, it cannot be
comprehended through motionless concepts or static. There is
performance in duration, the performance of World qua world.
Can you imagine watching Heidegger dance? Like the
French at their social events even in 2014, always two-stepping
76
Greene, Roland, Stephen Cushman, Clare Cavanagh, Jahan Ramazani,
Paul F. Rouzer, Harris Feinsod, David Marno, and Alexandra Slessarev. The
Princeton Encyclopedia of Poetry and Poetics. Princeton: Princeton UP, 2012.
Print.
Poïesis
83
or following any steps of any formalized dance style they’ve
recently taken classes for. There is no natural flow—everything
is movement through thinking, what’s the next step, removed
from innovation and moving with sensations, removed from
self expressing self in the world. Old school. Nineteenth
century style-continental living. Perhaps it’s time to gather
thee philosophers while we may and break out on the dance
floor—bust some moves, movement, get the adrenalin pumping,
and start really inventing, shall we? Maybe a little small dose of
ecstasy (ecstasis) may help those philosophers to initially break
out of their wallflower stance? Those German love doctors knew
how to cook it up to get the mood flowing, even in Heidegger’s
day. Perhaps he may have benefitted from a dose or two.77
Bergson consequently alleges that one can only be in the
grips of duration through his method of intuition. Flowing
without thinking,(indicative of Husserl’s zero point of
orientation). Two images from Henri Bergson’s An Introduction
to Metaphysics may help one to grasp Bergson’s term intuition,
the limits of concepts, and the capacity for intuition to
recognize ‘the absolute’.
If such a thing as an ‘absolute’ were to even exist—but
there is something inconceivably too linear, finite, and
man-made-like, so it seems, with such a word, a limit on
his own conceptual, so to speak. Peradventure, let’s call it an
amalgamation of the infinity of energy flowing within any
given location, and beyond if going deep enough, let’s call it
ones intuitive capacity to recognize ‘a zero space’.
In either case, the first image Bergson evokes to intuitively
perceive this is that of a city. (We are prompted to recall
here the Roman’s understanding of ‘the genius loci’, or the
77
“Utopian Pharmacology. MDMA / Ecstasy and beyond.” Utopian
Pharmacology. MDMA / Ecstasy and beyond. BLTC, 2010. Web. 02 Mar. 2014.
84
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part I — The Theories
poetic genius’ of a specified locale: see chapter 4). Analysis,
or the creation of concepts through the divisions of points
of view, can only ever give us a model of the city through a
construction of photographs taken from every possible point of
view, yet it can never give us the dimensional value of walking
in the city itself. One can only grasp this through intuition;
likewise the experience of reading a line of Homer. One may
translate the line and pile commentary upon commentary, but
this commentary too shall never grasp the simple dimensional
value of experiencing the poem in its originality itself. The
method of intuition, then, is that of getting back to the things
themselves 78 by simply wandering, observing, and letting the
things pass through you.
3.7 Poïesis
collided-life-forms-intersect, rotating-face(s)-of-selves, one
of the multiplicity is seen, once. another, yet again. position
in the gliding river as collision claps, sole determinant.
impacted from behind, form turns sideways, falls as the water,
downward. frontal hit, two forms tumble. external worlds,
combine process. stand, forge against current. sit, surrender to
stream. repeat. sometimes, unmovable. feet embedded under
stones. frozen water, mid-summer, climatic intensity—zero.
observe becoming. eyes, skin below surface, then rise.
78
Bergson, Henri, and Mabelle Louise Cunningham Andison. The Creative
Mind. New York: Philosophical Library, 1946. Print.
4.
What is a
‘Genius’?
G
ENIUS: FROM LATIN genere, gignere, to ‘beget, bring
forth’ or gigno, genui, genitus, “to bring into being, create,
produce.” (Homologous to poïesis). Genius in Roman
mythology originating from δαιμων (demon) in Greek referred
to “an attendant inner spirit assigned to every person at birth,
governing their fortunes and determining their character.” By
extension, the sense of genius as guardian spirit was applied to
specific groups, or to a particular place, as in the term genius
loci”79 Once again, a conceptual notion of zero space as a place
of inspiration—or perhaps, a zero-spatial-est—one who can
enter the loci of the inner spiritual, or transcendent space, as
unique to each location (hypostasis of place)–and bring into
being, create or produce. The genius was necessarily a Being
who lived in and through poiesis. The local poet, genius loci.
It was believed that every individual, family, and city had
its own genius. In that sense, every individual, family, and city
was believed to have the capacity to bring into being, create
and produce, something. The genius received special worship
as a household god because it was thought to grant success and
intellectual powers on its disciple. (A muse). On this basis, the
word came to nominate a person with unique intellectual as
well as creative powers. In art, or the visual depiction of the
Roman genius, we discover often the portrayal of a winged
79
Negus, K. and Pickering, M. (2004). Creativity, communication, and cultural
value. London; Thousand Oaks; New Delhi: SAGE Publications.
85
86
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part I — The Theories
young person; as if: flying off in liberation as recognized in the
natural independence of the child who is still free from the
imposition of logos,
You think you can’t get out of the logos, but in fact you
can use it to get out. Getting into something is just as
important as getting out of something. Get out of what
you have learned—curiosity, the unexpected, bring it back,
(childhood). Logos is such a knowledge, phenomenon, how
to do things. Without knowledge we couldn’t live, for
everyday life we need logos. Theory and practice all have
logos in it. But the act itself is the techne (art), a certain
understanding, but no logos. The moment you walk you are
in techne.”80
This notion is not far off from Sextus Empircus whose
conceptual suspension of judgement was the hallmark for
ancient Greek skepticism. According to him, suspension of
judgment liberates one from any form of intense agitation,
both intellectual and emotional, that is associated with
maintaining definitive beliefs about how things really are.
The suspension of judgment is therefore ataraxia, freedom
from worry. What Wolfgang Schirmacher points out is that
while getting rid of the logos allows one to enter into this state
where curiosity and the unexpected flourish, the imagination
runs wild and creations abound—the logos and knowledge is
still needed in maintaining everyday life, less we be primitive
animals. There is a classical balance required. The balance
between preserving convictions, opinions and assertions that
drive one to produce, and releasing all into the movement of
suspension where one lets the wind carry them where it will
and liberates into a zero space. Perhaps it is this: observation
Schirmacher, Wolfgang, “MEDIA AESTHETICS: The Homo Generator.”
European Graduate School, Saas-Fée. Aug. 2011. Lecture.
80
What is a ‘Genius’?
87
followed by intervention, and then repeat. That is the poet and
the dramatist combine: Poetist. One would necessarily need to
participate in suspension of judgment both alone in reflection
and while engaging with Others, followed by utilization of
the logos upon that reflection and again, while engaging in
discourse, with Others. There can be no permanent choice of
existing in one or the other, for in doing so we would either
become too apathetic or authoritarian robot. Therefore, going
into a zero space could be considered, in a skeptical sense, a
suspension of judgment, knowledge, opinion and emotion,
followed by a return to the logos wherein the creator marries
the experience within the suspension into the filter of the
logos. Pre-poïesis and poïesis. Nothing and infinity occurs
in suspension of judgment purely because when suspended
the openness allows us to observe and absorb infinitely
everything in the World and cosmos and all that we’ll never
truly understand, from the ant making its way across blades
of grass in the garden carrying the mortar to build its castle
with the members of it’s community, to zen blank spaces of
meditation where not a single thought enters one’s mind—and
within that equivalent of nothingness there is temporality,
for example: twenty minutes of pure suspension without
thought in meditation is equivalent to eight hours of sleep.
There are contemporary brain and heart surgeons in life or
death, eighteen hour surgical performances who can attest to
the efficiency of such practice. It is both physical and mental
recharge. But there is a dark side, within the infinity extreme
forms of negativity reside as well—intense pain, rage and
violence, for example. Repeated visits are bound to interact
with the spectrum of experiences within the infinity including
the intensely displeasing. Stuck too long within it, there is pure
madness.
88
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part I — The Theories
Also illustrated through art was the genius of place, which
was mostly depicted as a large snake. While in the Christian
dogma the snake is pejoratively conceived, in most all other
mythologies, it maintains a positive connotation of a living
form which can experience physical rebirth, (shedding of
skin), repeatedly—hence, one might interpret the visual snake
in the representation of genius of place, as the place which is
open to re-invent itself through the evolution of time and with
seasonal transformations. Daemon, or genius, in Roman times,
was regarded as an authentic source of human creativity. While
it seems apparent that the two are interrelated: the winged
person and the snake. The one who can fly into a suspension of
judgement, and the other who can come back to logos to use
knowledge enabling the shedding of old skin to recreate a place
into something new and evolved.
“Not long after Plutarch, Apuleius asserted in his own
reflection on the “god” of Socrates the direct correspondence
of the Greek daimon and the Roman genius. The coupling
allowed Romans to see their own genii in Greek demons, and
vice versa. Thus can the learned Varro speak of the genius in
terms that borrowed from Plato’s conception of the daimon
as the rational part of the soul. “Genius,” he writes, in a now
lost manuscript cited by Saint Augustine, “is the rational soul
(anima rationalis) of each man.” Apuleius maintained that
position while further incorporating the received Greek notion
that human beings were guided not only by a good god, a
friendly daimon-genius, but an evil one as well. Whereas the
good genius was simultaneously the god of the soul of each
man—dwelling “in the inmost sanctum of the human mind
in the function of consciousness itself ” —the evil genius
What is a ‘Genius’?
89
represented our potential for wickedness and depravity.”81 Or
as stated earlier, an inability to balance forces while processing
negativity for too long within the suspension of judgment—
then creating or destroying under its influence. Hence, a
battlefield of the conflicting forces of what was once called the
divine.
If one were to consider potentialities within the
psychology of the two dimensions of total suspension and total
logos, we might better understand the history of the genius as
it arrives at its apex of fascination within the Romantic period
until Hitler.
To reiterate: if one remains within the suspension of
judgment such things from debauchery to sheer violence may
be enabled, as the apathetic observer never arrives in a logos or
an emotionally compassionate or sympathetic state to consider
any harm in instinctive reaction: beyond good and evil.
However in the same light, if one remains in the logos without
ever suspending themselves from judgment, they might
equally get caught up in a robotic repetition of monotony
without ever progressing towards a more enlightened state of
existing, drones.
At a certain period, the terms daemon and genius
bifurcate, Greek daemon was turned to demon in Christianity
that was no longer both the good and the bad within the
genius, as it had been with the original concept found with the
Greeks, but instead an evil, distrustful, enemy to inspiration—
especially if it was not validated by the Church as having ‘the
right source, ‘ i.e. the Scripture interpreted by the Church in
conformity with the dictates of the moment and its current
relevance. The privilege of freethinking and expression that the
81
McMahon, Darrin M. Divine Fury: A History of Genius. New York: Basic,
2013. Print.
90
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part I — The Theories
ancient Greeks entertained was overpowered by a limited path
of Christian faith, entering centuries of sanctified logos. Genius
lumbered through the middle ages as less auspicious than its
previous praise. It held its position in culture, nonetheless,
through the Renaissance and exploded into a sort of cult
religion in the Romantic period. As the altered religious and
political environment changed, i.e. God was dead, Christianity
lost its power and capitalism celebrated original creativity and
individual invention, geniuses eventually became the new
replacement for god-like idols:
In God’s absence, human beings were free to assume
elements of power, taking on capacities that they had long
attributed to him. Yet the same withdrawal also had a more
negative effect, including a haunting sense of loneliness and
abandonment that was all the stronger for the flight of the
angels and the retreat of the guardian companions. To those
whom God had partially forsaken, to those without a comes
or friend, the universe could seem a lonely and disorienting
place...At no time had human beings lived alone in this way,
without mediators and intercessors to the divine. And it was
at just this moment (and for closely related reasons) that
they began to turn their gaze in earnest from the “always
already there” to the “yet to be realized,” focusing intently
on the future as the privileged place of human making, the
site of disclosure of the new and the unknown...they began
to look forward on time’s horizon, seeking the unexpected,
the original...Geniuses offered assurance that special beings
still animated the universe, that someone stood between
the ordinary and the unknown, the sacred and profane,
that a privileged few could see where the many were blind.
Revealing, disclosing, guiding, creating, the genius enchanted
a world threatened by disenchantment.82
McMahon, Darrin M. Divine Fury: A History of Genius. New York: Basic,
2013. Print.
82
What is a ‘Genius’?
91
Essentially it wasn’t until the first decades of the twentieth
century that the genius’ political power was fully realized
in the self-conception and enhanced public image of Adolf
Hitler through the full array of modern mass media. In
1914, Hermann Türck in his work The Man of Genius, used
the unlikely pairing of Napoleon and Jesus to demonstrate
his point that the savior and the conquerer were “alike in
their striving after the highest, eternal state of being.” His
administering the pair side by side was willfully Hegelian—
destruction and creation were adjoining relations, deliverance
and death shared a common cause.83 In this sense, where
the Greek demon and Roman genius had bifurcated in the
terminology of the Christians, they were once again reunited in
the aggrandizing cult following of the Romantic notions of the
kind. The dangerous connotations associated with the ‘genius’
was the lack of moral ground the notion possessed—the genius
was revered for the alleged profundity of his work and in
effect, person, regardless of its content or moral consequences.
In Thus Spoke Zarathrusta, Nietzsche wrote, “What is good
and evil no one knows yet, unless it be he who creates. He,
however, creates man’s goal and gives the earth its meaning
and its future. That anything at all is good and evil—that is his
creation.”84 Hitler rose to power using these very notions for his
political campaign in his call for a “dictator who is genius” in a
speech delivered in 1920. “Progress and the culture of mankind
are not products of the majority, but they rest exclusively on
the genius and the energy of the personality,” he observed in
his Mein Kampf, and further in a speech in 1938 he stated,
“whether or not we can today call geniuses of eternal standing
Türck, Hermann. The Man of Genius. London: Black, 1914. N. pag. Print.
Nietzsche, Friedrich Wilhelm, and R. J. Hollingdale. Thus Spoke Zarathustra:
A Book for Everyone and No One. Harmondsworth, England: Penguin, 1969.
Print.
83
84
92
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part I — The Theories
our own is difficult to judge, but in the end it is of little
consequence for our actions. What is of great consequence,
however, is the preservation of an environment in which true
geniuses can be nurtured.” Reminiscent here is the Romantic
notion of a brotherhood of genius that represented “the kinship
of humanity in its many different expressions,” however the self
proclaimed ‘genius’ Hitler was unfortunately not interested, or
referring to preserving an environment in which the kinship
of humanity’s geniuses could be nurtured, but rather where
the German Aryan race as the hierarchically strongest genius
blood in a eugenic sense, could be nature-d and nurtured. The
triumph over Hitler and his Nazi party marked a peripeteia
in the Romantic apotheosizing of the notion of genius,
positioning people on guard against investing in human idols
with such power.
In 1957, Roland Barthes in his work called Mythologies,
observed, “the more the genius was materialized under the
guise of his brain [Einstein], the more the product of his
inventiveness [his brain] came to acquire a magical dimension.”
In 1958 Hannah Arendt wrote of “the commercialization and
vulgarization of genius” as a practice that was slowly dissolving
the “great reverence the modern age so willingly paid to genius,
so frequently bordering on idolatry.”85 The yearning to establish
the genius’s fundamental distinction is pertinacious, and the
human craving for the transcendent and the extraordinary is
significant, no less in the present day than “when Socrates’s
contemporaries first marveled at his daimonion... This
gradual expansion of genius—in effect, its democratization
and globalization—gathered momentum in the aftermath of
1945. The development marked, in some sense, a return to an
85
Arendt, Hannah. The Human Condition. Chicago: U of Chicago, 1958. Print.
What is a ‘Genius’?
93
older understanding of genius as a faculty possessed by all...
Charles Spearman, the analyst of the all-governing g, was
prepared to admit ‘every normal man, woman and child is...a
genius at something’” 86 These new configurations of genius
carrying within them ancient notions of the ubiquitous sense
of the word, reduced the term to a mere masterly talent in one
domain or another.
In modern usage, genius calls attention to an innate ability
generating intellectual eminence and unprecedented creativity,
identifying a distinct type of human — a rare individual who
is “acutely innovative, original and superior”87. Genius has
been often opposed to talent as an innate creative ability and
the highest manifestation of creativity to a mere predisposed
response to education. Unlike talent, “original genius was truly
exceptional and by definition was to be exempt from the rules,
customs, and obligation that applied to the talented”88. Genius
is also defined by accomplishments and often yields a great
influence over contemporary and succeeding generations.89.
Accordingly, the best indicator of genius is fame: “For the most
part, to be identified as a genius an individual must become
famous, and the fame must be attained for making durable
contributions to cultural or political endeavors”90. (Here we are
86
McMahon, Darrin M. Divine Fury: A History of Genius. New York: Basic,
2013. Print.
87
Negus, K. and Pickering, M. (2004). Creativity, communication, and cultural
value. London; Thousand Oaks; New Delhi: SAGE Publications.
88
Runko, M. A. and Albert, R. S. (Eds.) (1990) Theories of creativity. Newburry
Park, CA: Sage Publications.
89
Albert, R. S. (1983). Genius and eminence: the social psychology of creativity
and exceptional achievement. International Series in Experimental Social
Psychology: International Series in Experimental Social Psychology, v. 5.
Oxford, New York: Pergamon Press.
90
Simonton, D.K. (1984). Genius, creativity, and leadership: Historiometric
inquiries. Cambridge, Mass: Harvard University Press.
94
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part I — The Theories
reminded of the second realm of Plato’s notions of poiesis in his
Symposium).
The ideology of genius as an exceptional personality
possessing some extraordinary qualities assumes that the
function of genius is to eliminate alienation, (of the self and
the world from themselves), and to establish “a higher order
in which unity is achieved or restored, and in which humanity
is fully realized”91. Or in the words of the prominent literary
critic Harold Bloom:
“Greatness may be out of fashion, as is the transcendental,
but it is hard to go on living without some hope of
encountering the extraordinary...appreciation is a better
mode for the understanding of achievement than are
all the analytic kinds of accounting for the emergence of
exceptional individuals. Appreciation may judge, but always
with gratitude, and frequently with awe and wonder...
By appreciation, I mean something more than ‘adequate
esteem’. Need also enters into it, in the particular sense of
turning to the genius of others in order to redress a lack
in oneself, or finding in genius a stimulus to one’s own
powers, whatever these may emerge as being...Appreciation
may modulate into love, even as a consciousness of a dead
genius augments consciousness itself. Your solitary self ’s
deepest desire is for survival, whether in the here or now, or
transcendentally elsewhere. To be augmented by the genius
of others is to enhance the possibilities of survival, at least in
the present and the near future... Genius is no longer a term
much favored by scholars, so many of whom have become
cultural levelers quite immune from awe. Yet, with the
public, the idea of genius maintains its prestige, even though
the word itself can seem somewhat tarnished. We need
genius, however envious or uncomfortable it makes many
among us. It is not necessary that we aspire after genius for
ourselves, and yet, in our recesses, we remember that we
91
Currie, R. (1974). Genius: An ideology in literature. London: Chatto &
Windus.
What is a ‘Genius’?
95
had, or have, a genius. Our desire for the transcendental
and extraordinary seems part of our common heritage, and
abandons us slowly, and never completely.”92
Genius, however, in the current trend for material gain,
and wealth idolization, is not simply used to describe thinking
new paradigmatic thoughts and creating new things, but more
so, how these things can be utilized to make more money.
The endgame, so it seems in contemporary day, is always
about money. As recent as 2011, in the well-regarded German
newspaper Die Zeit, a special issue was devoted to “geniuses
who have changed our life,” wherein the profiles of all included
were contemporary billionaires profiling such modern
incarnations as the Starbucks chief executive Howard Schultz;
Mark Zuckerberg, founder of Facebook; Miuccia Prada, the
Italian designer; Ingvar Kamprad, founder of Ikea; and, of
course, Steve Jobs, widely hailed at the time of his death, in
2011, as a genius.93
This current trend of appreciation for those with money
leads to a void in common consciousness—one driving the
will to create a fortune for conspicuous consumption leading
to over production and ecological disaster, rather than the
will to create awe and wonder stimulating one’s own power
and transcendental consciousness. As suggested by Harold
Bloom, “We all (need to) learn to distinguish, firmly and
definitively, between genius and talent. A ‘talent’ classically
was a weight or sum of money, and as such, however large,
92
Bloom, Harold. “What Is Genius?” Introduction. Genius: A Mosaic of One
Hundred Exemplary Creative Minds. New York: Warner, 2002. P. 5 Print.
93
Thadden, Elizabeth Von. “Visionäre: Die Unserer Zeit.” Die Zeit Nº 42
(2011): n. pag. 18 Oct. 2011. Web. 10 Mar. 2014.
96
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part I — The Theories
was necessarily limited. But ‘genius’, even in its linguistic
origins, has no limits.”94
Between the talent of those who make fortunes and the
genius of those who create works that lead the spectator to
be, in the words of the ancient Loginus, “Touched by the true
sublime your soul is naturally lifted up, she rises to a proud
height, is filled with joy and vaunting, as if she had herself
created this thing that she has heard,” this dissertation argues
for the latter to be brought back to public consciousness.
94
Bloom, Harold. “What Is Genius?” Introduction. Genius: A Mosaic of One
Hundred Exemplary Creative Minds. New York: Warner, 2002. P. 7 Print.
PART II
The Arts
97
98
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part Ii — The Arts
The Fourfold
of the Arts:
Literary (& performance) / Visual (& performance)
/ Sound (& performance)
POETRY OR STORYTELLING PREDATES WRITING.
The earliest poems are believed to have been orally recited
or sung to a group: singing, sound amongst vividly painted
bodies, moving, motion. If we could imagine our ancestors
sitting by a fire at loss for interaction or entertainment:
people begin tapping, humming, singing, banging, a poetic
Being in the midst of the circle, (if there was), in the middle
of their wilderness, stands up instinctively and begins to
invent a ‘story’, the only story evocative of the moment—a
conglomeration of the many events experienced by the
people—the people of a clan. The poet, (or poets), of the
location—genius loci. It is through these written stories we
may witness the beginning of Vico’s history as poiesis in action.
These stories represent examples of the first recorded poiesis
as a making form through the imaginary and experiential,
(memoria, fantasia, and ingegno- in universale fantastico) —
hence, through the use of metaphor/myth, as was purported by
Giambattista Vico in his New Science.
The most important part in the beginning was perhaps the
will to communicate, to draw intensive energy together within
the group, to create a union of trust and understanding of
sorts. It would seem that in such an initial gathering a person
gifted with ease in communication would stand first, followed
The Fourfold of the Arts
99
by an enthusiastic listener who added conceptions and
descriptions of the visual realm he/she envisioned throughout
the story—while all the while, others would react though
song, breath, whistle, taps or whatever sound was inspired
in a response to the intensities of the moments, creating a
rhythm — or any combination initiating or inspiring the
next. Eventually the Others would begin to join in, perhaps in
movement or theatrical performance. We can imagine how the
works were first evoked or presented, but what is remaining
in written form was the first recorded experience of poiesis, or
rather, history as poiesis.
The Poets—most obvious when you look directly in their
eyes—there is more to learn than words might describe. The
musical ones are frequently the most silent, resonating an
octave profoundly lower than most until in the movement of
creation, sound illuminates the eyes. The visual artists often
speak the most until in the movement of creation, silence and
stone tranced glance. The poetry and the performance poets
oscillate or conjugate between the two. Some favoring one side
or the other—the musical writers, the visual writers. (Nietzsche
names them the lyric or epic poets.) Then there is the Poetist,
the poet-dramatist, who both observes and participates—can
essentially move in-between, in and out, inverting positions
like the acrobat with seemingly distinct ease, belonging
to neither, accepted as either, never quite feeling at home
anywhere, and yet, everywhere seemingly at ease, chameleons:
the orchestrators of the scene.
Why some react to a given moment through instinctively
bellowing out words, visuals, sound or movement will never
be known to anyone, ever—or perhaps maybe when we die.
All we can try to understand is what happens when we are
100
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part Ii — The Arts
summoned, sometimes even without awareness, to react. To
be aware of what transpires up through, during and after the
poiesis, the creation, the liberation, the provocation to live with
renewed energy—to respond to life. We accept never knowing
why we are born with the will to create, why we are inspired
to continue when experience: trials, tribulations, trauma,
and trepidation wear our energy almost too thin to move on.
When the world around us seems steeped in murky shadows.
When we choose to close our eyes, let darkness prevail and
feel too weak to continue. Sound. Imagination. Creations of
visuals in our mind. Storytelling. Words. Fantasies of potential
future stories. Stories of Others—to liberate ourselves, to
communicate, to alleviate, to laugh, to love—to shock, shatter
and provoke eyes wide open. We accept that we will never
know why, but that doesn’t stop us from considering what to
do with the inspiration received. First, perhaps it is important
to consider what the Others before us have done and ask the
questions as posed by the artist Paul Gauguin Where do we
come from, What are we? Where are we going?95
95
Gauguin, Paul. Where Do We Come From, What Are We? Where Are We
Going? 1897-1898. Oil on canvas. Museum of Fine Arts, Boston.
5.
A Synoptic
Archeology of the
Poetry-Poets
The world is at every moment the attained manifestation
of God, as the eternally changing, eternally new vision of
the person who suffers most, who is the most rent with
contradictions, the one with the richest sense of protest, who
knows how to save himself only in illusion.96
—Friedrich Nietzsche
Meeting the extraordinary in another person is likely to be
deceptive or delusion-ary. We call it “falling in love,” and
the verb is a warning. To confront the extraordinary in a
book—be it the Bible, Plato, Shakespeare, Dante, Proust—is
to benefit almost without cost. Genius, in its writings, is our
best path for reaching wisdom, which I believe to be the true
use of literature for life...Vitatlity is the measure of genius.
We read in search of more life, and only genius can make
that available to use...Since we do not know how else to
account for Shakespeare (or Dante, Cervantes, Goethe, Walt
Whitman), what can we better do than return to the study
of the ancient idea of genius? Talent cannot originate, genius
must.97
—Harold Bloom
Nietzsche, Friedrich Wilhelm, Oscar Levy, and Robert Guppy. “The Birth
of Tragedy.” Complete Works. The First Complete and Authorized English
Translation. New York: Russell & Russell, 1964. N. pag. Print.
97
Bloom, Harold. “What Is Genius?” Introduction. Genius: A Mosaic of One
Hundred Exemplary Creative Minds. New York: Warner, 2002. P. 4 Print.
96
101
102
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part II — The Arts
5.1 The Early Period
Egypt and Iraq
Two of the oldest surviving poems are the Tale of the
Shipwrecked Sailor from ancient Egypt, and/or the Epic of
Gilgamesh from what is currently known as modern day
Iraq –both are said to date back to around 4500 B.C.E., with
some sources arguing over the precise dates. Both stories
could equally be classified under the umbrella of ‘wisdom
literature’: stories dealing with the question of good and evil in
the world, just as the demons and geniuses of the Roman and
Greek times would proceed and prehistoric man had begun,
(see chapter on The Early Period in visual art). These are our
first known written traces of history as poiesis. Evocative once
again of Vico’s notion of ‘Poetic Wisdom’: the metaphorical
speech of our past that is true from what is made. And in the
act of making, (poiesis), both enact tales which can be used
as metaphorical manuals for living within a given society.
Both tales, in fact, are the closest written evidence we have
discovered to confirm that for the past 7000 years, at least,
humans were living, exploring their worlds, surviving, feeling,
hurting, killing, loving, living, dying, and trying—at the least,
to understand and make sense of where they came from, what
they were doing here, and where they were going next, inbetween all the busy commotion of living and dying. Creating
language, as if to release the weight of non-understanding, so
that maybe one day they would discover a truth. Truth seeking,
as primal instinct, so it seems, even then—like sex, eating or
sleeping. Of course, even then, as now, some may have had
instinct to submerge into the energy of another motivated by
pure fascination and admiration, even love, of the Other; while
A Synoptic Archeology of the Poetry-Poets
103
others may have violently engaged in the act, purely interested
in personal libidinal alleviation, like in believing the genius as
one who makes a fortune.
Love is what makes sex more than masturbation. If there is
no love even if you are really with a partner you masturbate
with a partner.98
—Slavoj Zizek
The Tale of the Shipwrecked Sailor, our first encounter
with documented written creation, is, in short, an ancient
text containing an archetype narrative of magical/mystical
myth: an uninitiated hero is sent on a sea journey, he becomes
thrown off course by a storm, encounters an enchanted island,
confronts a monster, (a giant snake), survives, and returns
home wiser for the experience. In contemporary language this
might be rendered: a character on a spiritual quest journeys
through the cosmos, meets a primordial god, and returns with
a vision. In essence, homologous to the journey taken in the
process of creation: thrown, fallen or suspended into a zero
space, experience of nothing and infinity, is shocked, shattered,
or provoked, returns to the surface or consciousness filled with
only the will to create. So he/she writes the tale in metaphoric
fantasized form.
The literary history of the Epic of Gilgamesh starts
with five unconnected Sumerian poems about ‘Bilgamesh’
(Sumerian for Gilgamesh), king of Uruk, (modern day Iraq).
Four of these were used as source material for a combined epic
in Akkadian. As a written language, Akkadian is first verified
in Sumerian texts from ca. the late 29th century BC, some
98
Interview. HARTtalk. BBC World Service. 12 Jan. 2010. Television.
104
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part II — The Arts
1600 years after the stories were apparently begun orally. From
the second half of the third millennium BC (ca. 2500 BC),
texts fully written in Akkadian begin to appear. Hundreds of
thousands of texts and text fragments have been excavated
to date, covering a vast textual tradition of mythological
narrative, legal texts, scientific works, correspondence,
political and military events, and many other examples. By
the second millennium BC, two variant forms of the language
were in use in Assyria, (Northern Mesopotamia, or Iraq) and
Babylonia, (Southern Iraq) known as Assyrian and Babylonian
respectively.
This first combined epic, known as the “Old Babylonian”
version, dates to the 18th century BC and is titled after its
incipit, (first few words of the first line of the text), Shūtur eli
sharrī (“Surpassing All Other Kings”). Only a few fragments of
it have survived. The later “Standard Babylonian” version dates
from the 13th to the 10th centuries BC and bears the incipit
Sha naqba īmuru (“He who Saw the Deep”), in modern terms:
‘He who Sees the Unknown’. One need not state the obvious
relativity to our conceptual zero space in this, one of the very
first recorded tales of mankind. In this sense, we might say,
since the first recorded story of man, the unknown space
of zero, was explored. History as poiesis began here with a
description of a journey into the unknown as its central theme.
Greece
The ancient Greeks positioned distinguished importance on
literature. Innumerable authors deem the beginning of the
western literary tradition with the epic poems of The Iliad
and The Odyssey for the masterly craftsmanship in portraying
the timeless dualisms of war and peace, honor and disgrace,
A Synoptic Archeology of the Poetry-Poets
105
and love and hatred. We will focus here mainly on the tale
of the Odyssey, another epic journey originally thought to
be transmitted orally. In the spirit of what we call magical
realism today, the tale is about the warrior Odysseus returning
home from the Trojan war, (recounted in the prequel, the
Iliad). During his return home the highly intelligent and
cunning main character, known as a polymath, continually
runs into strange creatures and monsters and one strange
culture and land after another, attempting to prevent him from
getting home to his wife and son. Though the story is said to
have been written by the Greek poet Homer, some sources
believe there was never one poet, but rather The Odyssey is
a compilation of the gradual evolution of stories told orally
from the homecoming of soldiers for hundreds of years. The
original compilation of stories was known as The Returns: tales
of soldiers quests to return home from war and all the conflicts
encountered in their journeys. Once again, indicative of Vico’s
notion of history as poiesis. Homer, by transcribing all the
stories into poetic written form, largely formed the foundation
of the Greek, secular and Western world virtues:
The Iliad and The Odyssey taken together communicate
the recurring theme noted in the chapter on genius, that man
is not a mindless body who should, like an animal, act blindly
on his emotions or instinct; nor is he a mystical soul/mind
who should shun this world and seek to escape his body and
this life. Rather, Homer’s work communicates that man is a
being of both mind and body — and that given this fact he
must act in a certain way, he must live up to his nature and
not shrink from it. Specifically, man must have inner strength
and outer strength. Inner strength means man must use his
intelligence and value his mind; he must also have the ability
106
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part II — The Arts
to keep his blind inner passions or emotions in check to avoid
recklessness. Outer strength means that man must be able to
effectively fight to achieve and / or protect his values, especially
kleos (“glory” won through great deeds).99
Some three hundred years after Homer, before the
tragedy, there was an era of static, idealized plastic art in the
form of sculpture that represented the Apollonian view of the
world. Then came Aeschylus and his new invention of written
dialogue and interactive characters, inventing the craft of what
we now call drama. Aeschylus, as well as Sophocles created
a body of work which Nietzsche, in his The Birth of Tragedy,
considered the last great creations of artistic mastery in which
all the spectators were drawn into the sublime act of the
collaborative creation itself, or what we call here, the creators
inspired zero spaces.
Before this time, the Dionysian element was only to be
found in the wild delight of festivals and drunkenness, but
most paramount, in music. The combination of these elements
in one art form gave birth to tragedy. Nietzsche asserts that the
tragedy of Ancient Greece was the highest form of art due to
its mixture of both Apollonian and Dionysian, (Nietzschean
DNA), elements into one seamless ensemble, allowing the
spectators for the first time, to come into contact with the
all-embracing spectrum of the human condition through the
spectacle. The Dionysian element was located in the music of
the chorus, while the Apollonian element was located in the
dialogue which gave a concrete symbolism that balanced the
Dionysiac imaginary. Basically, the Apollonian spirit was able
to give form to the abstract Dionysian.
99
Homer : His Accomplishments, Beliefs, Ideas, Biography. Heroes. Western
Culture Global, n.d. Web. 09 Mar. 2014.
A Synoptic Archeology of the Poetry-Poets
107
Nietzsche locates in classical Athenian tragedy an art
form that transcended the skepticism and negativity of an
essentially meaningless world. The Greek spectators, by
taking a gaze into the abyss of human suffering as witnessed
through the spectacle: hardship, distress, misery, wretchedness,
adversity, tribulation, pain, agony, anguish, trauma, torment,
torture, hurt, affliction, sadness, unhappiness, sorrow, grief,
woe, angst, heartache, heartbreak, stress—and affirming,
proclaiming and pronouncing it before the public, passionately
and joyously, declared the validity of their own existence. They
knew themselves to be infinitely more than inconsequential
creatures, finding self-affirmation not in another world, not
in a life to come, (as the religions would attempt to have
humanity believe for the next two thousand years), but in
the terror and ecstasy alike celebrated in the performance
of these tragedies. The intensities: felt, observed, witnessed,
experienced.
Thus, to be saved, it comes close to the healing magician, art.
Art alone can turn those thoughts of disgust at the horror
or absurdity of existence into imaginary constructs, which
permit living to continue. These constructs are the Sublime
as the artistic mastering of the horrible and the Comic as the
artistic release from disgust at the absurd.100
Nietzsche insists, “the illusion of culture was wiped away
by the primordial image of man” for the spectators; they
associated with and as the chorus energetically, “so that they
imagined themselves as restored natural geniuses.”101 But in
100
Nietzsche, Friedrich Wilhelm, Oscar Levy, and Robert Guppy. “The Birth
of Tragedy.” Complete Works. The First Complete and Authorized English
Translation. New York: Russell & Russell, 1964. Print.
101
Ibid.
108
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part II — The Arts
this condition, they have an Apollonian fantasized mirage of
themselves, of the energy they’re personifying. It’s a vision of
the god, of a zero space, appearing before the chorus on the
stage. The performers and the scenario are the establishment
of that fantasized vision, the essence of which is the enraptured
disembodiment of the zero space, of the inseparable and
oscillating bliss and suffering of human existence. In fact,
according to Nietzsche, the performance was able to capture
the audience and bring them all into what we call here the zero
space(s) of the poets themselves,
..nothing can be more obvious than that the poet is only a
poet because of the fact that he sees himself surrounded by
shapes which live and act in front of him and into whose
innermost being he gazes. Through some peculiar weakness
in our modern talent, we are inclined to imagine that
primitive aesthetic phenomenon in too complicated and
abstract a manner.102
Hence, an encounter with the four arts, beginning with
the drama, (Aesychlus’s literary invention of writing drama),
and adding the visual, sound and performance in the staged
production, collaborating together to draw the spectators into
the place of creation itself.
5.2 On Missionary Prophesying
Amidst the errors there shone forth men of genius; no less
keen were their eyes, although they were surrounded by
darkness and dense gloom.
—Petrarch 1367
102
Ibid.
A Synoptic Archeology of the Poetry-Poets
109
“Religion ceases to be an inexplicable hallucination and
takes a foothold in reality.”103
Once the oral traditions were documented in written
form by the scribes, ancient thinkers sought to determine what
makes the varying poetry and drama distinctive as a form
and what distinguishes good poetry from bad, resulting in
the development of “poetics”, or the study of the aesthetics of
poetry and what we know today as literary criticism.
Eventually, written poetry would be appropriated into
religious texts and influence religious movements. Religion,
earliest known etymology from: relegere/religare: the former—
to gather things together or pass over the same ground
repeatedly; the latter: to bind things together. By recalling
the story of the people, this ancient artistic practice assisted
in uniting people by creating a sense of community through
common ideas, laws, genealogy and a shared history. Though,
as Giambattista Vico has pointed out in his New Science,
the ancient sages reached a vital awareness that humans had
strayed from maintaining—predominantly that, “the true is
precisely what is made”. And in doing so, the Old Testament,
the first of the three Western Abrahamic religions, (Judaism,
Christianity, Islam), was compiled and edited by various men
over a period of centuries, with many scholars concluding that
the Hebrew canon, which spurred the other two dominant
western religions, was solidified by about the 3rd century BC. 104
As people begin to create religions by gathering stories
of the past told from poets throughout the centuries who
103
Bowker, John. Introduction. The Oxford Dictionary of World Religions.
Oxford: Oxford UP, 1997. Print.
104
Lim, Timothy H. (2005). The Dead Sea Scrolls: A Very Short Introduction.
Oxford: Oxford University Press. p. 41.
110
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part II — The Arts
imagined the world and beyond around them, the rational
gatherers observing closely recognized the poets had a
different kind of spirit than the rest of the crowd, (i.e. Plato
sending them into exile). Through their poetic practice they
had the capacity to reshape and reform through the imaginary,
all that lay within their worlds. Both creation and destruction.
This was poignantly noted by Plato, who seems to have been
influenced in his philosophies by the Eleusinian Mysteries,
which in turn, (and not surprisingly), influenced, in part, some
creations in the Christian New Testament.
According to Thomas Taylor, “the dramatic shows of
the Lesser Mysteries occultly signified the miseries of the
soul while in subjection to the body, so those of the Greater
obscurely intimated, by mystic and splendid visions, the felicity
of the soul both here and hereafter, when purified from the
defilements of a material nature and constantly elevated to the
realities of intellectual [spiritual] vision.” And that according
to Plato, “the ultimate design of the Mysteries … was to lead us
back to the principles from which we descended, … a perfect
enjoyment of intellectual [spiritual] good.”105 The Roman
philosopher Cicero would concur hundreds of years later:
For among the many excellent and indeed divine institutions
which your Athens has brought forth and contributed
to human life, none, in my opinion, is better than those
mysteries. For by their means we have been brought out of
our barbarous and savage mode of life and educated and
refined to a state of civilization; and as the rites are called
“initiations,” so in very truth we have learned from them the
beginnings of life, and have gained the power not only to live
happily, but also to die with a better hope.
—Cicero, Laws II, xiv, 36
105
Taylor, Thomas, Alexander Wilder, and Albert L. Rawson. The Eleusinian
and Bacchic Mysteries. A Dissertation. New York: J.W. Bouton, 1891. Print.
A Synoptic Archeology of the Poetry-Poets
111
The poets doing the imagining, or working in poiesis,
would not be easily convinced into believing and following
one Absolute Idea—after all, the stories they created were no
ultimate guidebook of laws for the universe, especially when
the universe was constantly in motion and change—they
themselves could create multiple possibilities just imagining
it. It would be a bit hubristic to think any one person or one
vision should determine the way in which an entire society
was expected to live, forever. But unless they expected to live
themselves, eventually they would need to play the game now
being forced upon them for many centuries to come.
The Eleusinian Mysteries were the first of the Western
“Sacred ways” in which initiation into the cult could assure you
life after death. However, if you slipped and revealed the ‘secret
mysteries’ to anyone outside the cult, the penalty was death.
In fact, the tragic playwright Aeschylus was allegedly tried for
revealing secrets of the Mysteries in some of his plays, but was
acquitted.
So by the actions and decisions invested in the powers
that be, beginning with Plato and his ultimate rationalizing
objectives, the poets were relegated to ranks of the
madmen(women) of society. The mysteries continued to bear
influence on thinking up through and including the early
Roman times, until around the 4th century AD when the
Christian invaders would descend upon their sacred sites and
destroy them all, while naturally appropriating some of their
ideas, namely, that following their ‘religion’ would assure you a
place into the afterworld, only this time the cult was called The
Christians.
Everyone was to follow the stories that had been
imagined without question, including the poets (story makers)
112
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part II — The Arts
themselves, less they be exiled or beheaded. Eventually, the
poets thus forth began to create in the religious imaginary,
as their patrons and sole bread and butter came from the
aggrandizing religious ruling class.
The literature which evolves from this period forward
and throughout the middle ages is predominantly theological
in nature, as the Catholic clerics were the intellectual center
of society and their writing generated the greatest quantity.
While there does exist secular writings from the period: epics,
chivalric romances and many stories of unrequited longing,
the majority are anonymous. The bulk of poets attributed their
works as re-tellings and embellishments of stories they’d heard
from the Church fathers. One need not stretch imagination
too far to comprehend the stifling and prominent fear of death
the poets amongst the land shared during this period in which
creating beyond the limits put forth by the Church, ended. The
poets, after all, could go into their own personal zero spaces
and share their creations with their families and close friends
as often as they liked without feeling the need for notoriety or
fame in the cities, (Plato’s 2nd realm of poiesis—one, perhaps
the most sincere of poets have no need for)—as the isolation of
poets began its ascent in time.
Dante Aligheri
At the end of the medieval ages and leading the people into the
early Italian Renaissance period, an Italian poet emerged who’s
work and name will live on, perhaps for as long as the planet
exists. Dante Alighieri and his work, The Divine Comedy, is
an imaginary encapsulated period piece which defined the
essence of the époque at the tail end of its journey. Dante wrote
most of his poetry in the Italian vernacular instead of Latin,
A Synoptic Archeology of the Poetry-Poets
113
a choice that would influence the entire course of western
literary development. In it we witness magnificent poiesis
fantasizing within the confines of a space that informed it. The
genius poet, suspended in judgment, surrendered to the 800
year old meta-narrative that dominated his world, mourning
the loss of his family, contemplating an unrequited love of
his youth, and having become literally blind, he fell privy to
existing and elaborately creating in the only story he knew, he
dreamed, he lived, quotidian—an imaginary into the Christian
dualism of hell and paradise. But if we look closely, the last
word in each of the three parts of the Divine Comedy is stelle
(“stars”) –a light, into the cosmos of the unknown, perhaps the
poet, too, was simply seeking balance, either that, or escape.
Chiming in from the not so distant future of this
encapsulation, we hear sounds of Vico declaring his
imaginative universal (universale fantastico). Many of the
poems surviving the ancient world are the very framework we
use to develop our grasp of the details from these cultures of
our origins—the lifestyles of our ancestors. Their poems are
often stories about mystical subject matter, as well as politics
and wars, and the important organizing myths of societies. But
all of them, whichever direction they take, discuss journeys
within the abstract darkness (zero spaces) and out again.
The poets throughout time retell the experiences in infinite
accounts. Eventually varying stories were appropriated by the
organizing leaders who in turn paid the scribes, (or who were
scribes themselves), to create stories of which the masses of
people would believe and follow as universal law. These could
be used to tame and control society, to convince them that
theirs was the true path needed to be followed to enter into
eventual liberation from universal suffering: Paradise, Ein Sof,
114
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part II — The Arts
Nirvana, Apeiron, Jannah, Tao, Absolute, Ultimate, Beatific
Vision, etc.. The circles of truths, keeping the rows of people
thread together in their societies.
The main paradigmatic shift Dante offered the world was
the change of literary language from sanctified Latin verse, to
common vernacular, in his case, Italian. Quite simply, a notion
of informality was introduced.
5.3 On Evolving Limits
William Shakespeare
As the Christian sanctioned middle ages were coming to an
end, and early Italian Renaissance was blossoming into full
bloom around continental Europe and England, ‘rational
thinking’ philosophers and political leaders alike began to
consider once again the importance of poets. And the world
certainly needed a makeover. Thus began the ascent into the
heart of the Renaissance period, the beginning of the rejection
of gods and religion, characterized by the adoption of a
humanist philosophy and focus, the recovery of the classical
literature of Antiquity and benefitting from the spread of
printing in the latter part of the 15th century.
Finally, in 1564, the world gives birth to Shakespeare,
the first genius poet-dramatist in almost two thousand years
to create a universal life altering body of work. And just how
did Shakespeare manage such a paradigm shift through his
work? According to the literary theorist, Harold Bloom, in
his work Shakespeare: The Invention of the Human, “Literary
character before Shakespeare is relatively unchanging; women
and men are represented as aging and dying, but not as
A Synoptic Archeology of the Poetry-Poets
115
changing because their relationship to themselves, rather that
to the gods or God, has changed. In Shakespeare, characters
develop rather than unfold, and they develop because they
re-conceive themselves. Sometimes this comes about because
they overhear themselves talking, whether to themselves or to
others. Self-overhearing is their royal road to individuation, and
no other writer, before or since Shakespeare, has accomplished
so well the virtual miracle of creating utterly different yet
self-consistent voices for his more than one hundred major
characters and many hundreds of highly distinctive minor
personages.”106 ‘Self-overhearing’, or perhaps a precursor or
foreshadowing to what will eventually metamorphosis into
interior monologue, or the beginning of what both poets and
novelists alike will later use as stream-of-consciousness as the
world moves hence forward from the collective experience,
deeper and deeper into the individual experience.
In essence, Shakespeare becomes one of our first human
psychologists creating through his poiesis the first of what
we come to understand as character becoming conscious of
their own consciousness as well as those of others, (what will
eventually develop through the evolution of literary works as
consciousness of one’s own subconsciousness), and in doing
so, allows the audience and readers that capacity to encounter
themselves and become conscious of their own development
and thoughts in the process. “Imitations produce pain or
pleasure, not because they are mistaken for realities, but
because they bring realities to mind.”107
106
Bloom, Harold. “Shakespeare’s Universalism.” Introduction. Shakespeare:
The Invention of the Human. New York: Riverhead, 1998. N. pag. Print.
107
Shakespeare, William, and Samuel Johnson. The Plays of William
Shakespeare in Eight Volumes. London: Printed for J. and R. Tonson, 1765.
Print.
116
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part II — The Arts
In comparison with the previous discussion of Nietzsche’s
analysis of the Greek tragedians, we discover a common theme
within these works of the presentation evoking a similar
response as the Greek spectators, who, by taking a gaze into the
abyss of human suffering as witnessed through the spectacle,
declared the validity of their own existence. The difference
between Shakespeare and the Greek tragedies, however, is in
the collective versus the individualistic focalization.
Samuel Johnson, in his work on Shakespeare published
on 10 October 1765 as The Plays of William Shakespeare, in
Eight Volumes, is one of the first literary critics to declare that
Shakespeare’s greatness was in his precision and poignant
portrayal of human nature in such a diversity of persons that
his works become universal in scope and not merely a social
phenomenon. Or as Harold Bloom puts it, “An experiential
critic above all, Johnson knew that realities change, indeed are
change. What Shakespeare invents are ways of representing
human changes, alterations not only caused by flaws and by
decay but effected by the will as well, and by the will’s temporal
vulnerabilities.”
In this invocation of the will found in Bloom’s analysis of
Shakespeare’s capacity to display the ever changing desires of
man, we are reminded of Arthur Schopenhauer’s work on The
World as Will and..Vorstellung (Ideas, Representation), written
in 1818, 108 some 250 years after the Bard. Richard E. Aquila
in his recent translation of Schopenhauer’s work109 changes
the original Vorstellung translation to Presentation and states
that the world that we perceive is a “presentation” of objects in
the theatre of our own mind; the observers, the “subject,” each
Schopenhauer, Arthur, and E. F. J. Payne. The World as Will and
Representation. New York: Dover Publications, 1966. Print.
109
Schopenhauer, Arthur, David Carus, and Richard E. Aquila. The World as
Will and Presentation. New York: Pearson Longman, 2008. Print.
108
A Synoptic Archeology of the Poetry-Poets
117
craft the show with their own stage managers, stagehands, sets,
lighting, code of dress, pay scale, etc. The other aspect of the
world, the Will, or “thing in itself,” which is not perceivable as a
presentation, exists outside time, space, and causality.
Schopenhauer used the word “will” as human’s most
familiar designation for the concept that can also be signified
by other words such as “desire,” “striving,” “wanting,” “effort,”
and “urging.” Schopenhauer’s philosophy holds that all nature,
including man, is the expression of an insatiable will to life.
It is through the will that mankind finds all their suffering.
Desire for more is what causes this suffering. Or in Nietzsche’s
follow up with the will to power110 as a struggle against one’s
surroundings that culminates in personal growth, selfovercoming, and self-perfection. From there, spurns, Freud’s
will to pleasure111, Adler’s individual psychology112, and
Frankl’s will to meaning113: all uniquely different interpretative
conceptions of the will. Though no matter which definition or
concept of the will one subscribes to, it is clear that whatever
it is, it involves the individual, personal drive and motivation
in existing towards or for something. And from Shakespeare’s
body of work, the world opens into this new realm of
exploration: literature as the representation of the individual’s
personal journey through time, whether clothed in allegory,
metaphor and allusions, or directly stated.
Nietzsche, Friedrich Wilhelm, Walter Arnold Kaufmann, and R. J.
Hollingdale. The Will to Power. New York: Random House, 1967. Print.
111
Freud, Sigmund, Josef Breuer, James Strachey, Anna Freud, and Angela
Richards. The Standard Edition of the Complete Psychological Works of Sigmund
Freud. London: Vintage, 2001. Print.
112
Adler, Alfred. The Neurotic Constitution: Outlines of a Comparative
Individualistic Psychology and Psychotherapy. New York: Moffat, Yard, 1917.
Print.
113
Frankl, Viktor E., and Ilse Lasch. Man’s Search for Meaning: An Introduction
to Logotherapy. Boston: Beacon, 1962. Print.
110
118
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part II — The Arts
5.4 On Liberated Stream of
Consciousness
A man exists for culture, not for what he can accomplish,
but for what can be accomplished in him...he wishes more
to know the history and destiny of man; whilst the clouds
of egotists drifting about him are only interested in a low
success.114
—Ralph Waldo Emerson
The temporal and reasoned height and fall of the
Enlightenment and through the the eighteenth century was
shifting gradually from the past to the future, with a new
emphasis on becoming, on progress, on development and
growth. The change of focus in literature and the arts in the
dawning of the romantic period—from aesthetics of mimesis
to an aesthetics of originality was a symptom of that shift.115
5.4.1 Goethe
Goethe, the literary genius who drove the world forward
into the romantic period, shifted the tone of literature, from
the Shakespearean universal outward inspection of Others,
to the universal inward gaze of the self; a self in relation to
the Zeitgeist of the times. The Romantic shift in perspective
validated intense emotion as an authentic source of aesthetic
experience, placing new emphasis on such emotions and
harnessing the power of imagination to envision and to escape
the confines of conflictual transgressions in the outside world:
population growth, urban sprawl and industrialism.
Goethe’s monumental contribution to the world perhaps
Emerson, Ralph Waldo. Representative Men. S.l.: Bohn, 1850. Print.
Gauchet, Marcel. The Disenchantment of the World: A Political History of
Religion. Princeton, NJ: Princeton UP, 1997. Print.
114
115
A Synoptic Archeology of the Poetry-Poets
119
dwells in his ability to demonstrate through his forthcoming
personalized creations, the ability for the artist to liberate
themselves through the creative process. While his work is
extensive and the two examples that follow are but a morsel of
his exemplary lifetime achievement, they serve to illustrate best
his premier notions of spiritual/mental liberation through a
lifetime of creative undertaking.
Goethe’s philosophy of creativity revolves around
what he called das Dämonische (the demonic). According
to him, the process of the creation represents a strange
exorcism, as the entire daemonic creative force of the
author is transposed in his universal literature. In one of
his discussions with Eckermann116 regarding the demonic,
Goethe makes the following mention which is often quoted
in the works residing upon this subject, that “..in poetry,
especially in that which is unconscious, before which reason
and understanding fall short, and which therefore produces
effects so far surpassing all conception, there is always
something dæmonic” The demonic, as Goethe repeatedly
maintains, should not be confused with the diabolic, but
rather in the Greek notion of an attendant inner spirit
assigned to every person at birth, governing their fortunes
and determining their character. It represents the mysterious
power which can be manifested not only in certain
personalities but in things, events or entire epochs. In his
Poetry and Truth the author says “...this demoniacal element
can manifest itself in all corporeal and incorporeal things,
and even expresses itself.”117 The demon, or in Goethe’s vision
the demonic, manifests itself both in humans, animals and
116
Eckermann, Johann Peter, Johann Wolfgang Von. Goethe, Frederic Soret,
and John Oxenford. Conversations of Goethe. S.l.: Bell, 1883. Print.
117
Goethe, Johann Wolfgang Von. Poetry and Truth. London: Bell, 1908. Print.
120
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part II — The Arts
things, which is not so important as it is its shift from one to
another. Goethe’s demonic comes out of him and passes this
time not into an animal but into a thing, more specifically, his
own works. “Goethe believed in his own daemons, who seem
to have endowed him with occult energies, including parodistic
appropriation of all his forerunners, from Homer on to
Shakespeare’s Hamlet. Wisdom, according to the later Goethe is
equivocal in his renunciations, and it is difficult to reconcile his
achieved wisdom with his sly outrageousness.”118
“When a work was finished, it became uninteresting to me;
I thought of it no more, but busied myself with a new plan.”119
Nonetheless, Goethe had a special relation with two of his
works. The first, The Sorrows of Young Werther, and the other,
Elegy from Marienbad. Although both of them liberated Goethe
from some despairing conditions, these two works represent
at the same time two extremes of the way in which the author
liberated himself by transposing his suffering into poetry. In
Goethe’s own testimony in Poetry and Truth regarding the
process of creating The Sorrows of Young Werther, he states:
By these convictions I freed myself, not so much from the
danger as from the whim of suicide, which in those splendid
times of peace, and with an indolent youth, had managed
to creep in. Among a considerable collection of weapons, I
possessed a handsome, well polished dagger. This I laid every
night by my bed; and, before 1 extinguished the candle, I
tried whether I could succeed in plunging the sharp point
a couple of inches deep into my heart. Since 1 never could
succeed in this, I at last laughed myself out of the notion,
threw off all hypochondriacal fancies, and resolved to live.120
Bloom, Harold. “Hokmah: Lustre 4.” Genius: A Mosaic of One Hundred
Exemplary Creative Minds. New York: Warner, 2002. 160-61. Print.
119
Eckermann, Johann Peter, Johann Wolfgang Von. Goethe, Frederic Soret,
and John Oxenford. Conversations of Goethe. S.l.: Bell, 1883. Print.
120
Goethe, Johann Wolfgang Von. Poetry and Truth. London: Bell, 1908. Print.
118
A Synoptic Archeology of the Poetry-Poets
121
In order to detach himself temporarily from the “suicide
fixation”, Goethe determines Werther to commit suicide for
him, creating thus a character who decides to die so that
his creator may live. In one of Goethe’s candid testimonies
regarding the origin of The Sorrows of Young Werther he
recounts:
...but, to be able to do this, with cheerfulness, I was obliged
to solve a poetical problem by which all that I had felt,
thought, and fancied upon this important point should be
reduced to words...For by this composition, more than by
any other, I had freed myself from that stormy element,
upon which, through my own fault and that of others,
through a mode of life both accidental and chosen, through
design and thoughtless precipitation, through obstinacy
and pliability. I had been driven about in the most violent
manner. I felt, as if after a general confession, once more
happy and free, and justified in beginning a new life.”121
A tragic reality had thus become a masterpiece of German
literature. And by some mystifying process the “suicide
fixation” which Goethe freed himself by writing The Sorrows of
Young Werther, was transmitted to the public. Goethe confesses
in this respect: “But while I felt relieved and enlightened by
having turned reality into poetry, my friends were led astray by
my work ; for they thought that poetry ought to be turned into
reality, that such a moral was to be imitated, and that, at any
rate, one ought to shoot oneself. What had first happened here
among a few, afterwards took place among the larger
public; and this little book, which had been so beneficial to
me, was decried as extremely injurious.”
121
Ibid.
122
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part II — The Arts
zAs Madame de Staël once stated, Werther caused more
suicides than the most beautiful woman in the world. In Poetry
and Truth, Goethe allocated many pages to The Sorrows of
Young Werther, conceivably still amazed by the devastating
effect the book had on its audience. Perhaps the overnight
success and effects the book had on its readers demonstrates
more about the audience or society itself than its intrinsic value
or author. Goethe , in his astute poiesis was working within
the zeitgeist of his time: an age that was haunted by ideas of
suicide. “The effect of this little book was great, nay, immense,
and chiefly because it exactly hit the temper of the times.
For as it requires but a little match to blow up an immense
mine, so the explosion which followed my publication was
mighty, from the circumstance that the youthful world had
already undermined itself: and the shock was great, because
all extravagant demands, unsatisfied passions, and imaginary
wrongs were suddenly brought to an eruption.”122 Or, as Harold
Bloom says it, “If it was irony, such irony was wholly Goethean,
another original mode, nature’s own irony speaking through an
individual.”123 Contrasting in content, though equivocal in the
process of liberating the author from the chains of daemonic
frenzy, Elegy of Marienbad, the manuscript which Goethe,
“prized above all the rest,” became a demonic work, par
excellence, and in the words of the literary scholar and poet
Friedrich Gundolf : “... almost everything Goethe writes from
here on consists of moral reflections and applications which
are either calm, almost rigid or severe, energetic approvals and
disprovals uttered with superiority.”124 Or otherwise stated,
Ibid.
Bloom, Harold. “Hokmah: Lustre 4.” Genius: A Mosaic of One Hundred
Exemplary Creative Minds. New York: Warner, 2002. 175. Print.
124
Gundolf, Friedrich. Goethe. Berlin: G. Bondi, 1916. Print.
122
123
A Synoptic Archeology of the Poetry-Poets
123
all works thereafter lack ‘demonism’ or rather, are no longer
inspired by possessed creative frenzy. Goethe states in one of
his conversations with Eckermann. “This time the counterweight of the demonic is not taste but wisdom (die Weisheit).”
It shall not only calm the impulses of the demonic of which
Goethe is possessed, but will substitute it for good after the
exorcise represented by the Elegy from Marienbad:
Now am I far! And what would best befit
The present minute? I could scarcely tell;
Full many a rich possession offers it,
These but offend, and I would fain repel.
Yearnings unquenchable still drive me on,
All counsel, save unbounded tears, is gone.
Flow on, flow on in never-ceasing course,
Yet may ye never quench my inward fire!
Within my bosom heaves a mighty force,
Where death and life contend in combat dire.
Medicines may serve the body’s pangs to still;
Nought but the spirit fails in strength of will.125
After a lifetime of extreme hard work and perseverance,
Goethe becomes the exemplary literary genius who succeeds
in extinguishing his demon forever, “... why should I care such
wisdom vast to know?” His inner balance is re-established
after sheer confusion by an equally demonic love as the
elegy occasioned. “Goethe’s hyper-trophied will specific
to the demonic man ceases to exist after the Elegy from
Marienbad.”126 In doing so, Goethe paradigmatically sets the
rest of the world on a path of exploration to better understand
the conscious and subconscious relationship in the individual
125
Goethe, Johann Wolfgang. Elegy from Marienbad. Translated by Edgar
Alfred Bowring
126
Râmbu, Nicolae. O demonismo da criação na filosofia de Goethe. Trans/
Form/Ação,Marília, v. 35, n.3, p. 67-80, Set./Dez., 2012.
124
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part II — The Arts
mind. For the sake of this work, we will focus solely on the
succeeding literary implications from this major shift in
introspective and hyper-individualistic concentration.
And Goethe said, Yes, Shakespeare, humanity is infinitely
vast, but let’s look inside the individual and discover how
to find individual peace, and then maybe we can move
forward.
5.4.2 Charles Baudelaire
Be always drunken.
Nothing else matters:
that is the only question.
If you would not feel
the horrible burden of Time
weighing on your shoulders
and crushing you to the earth,
be drunken continually.
Drunken with what?
With wine, with poetry, or with virtue, as you will.
But be drunken.
And if sometimes,
on the stairs of a palace,
or on the green side of a ditch,
or in the dreary solitude of your own room,
you should awaken
and the drunkenness be half or wholly slipped away
from you,
ask of the wind,
or of the wave,
or of the star,
or of the bird,
or of the clock,
of whatever flies,
A Synoptic Archeology of the Poetry-Poets
125
or sighs,
or rocks,
or sings,
or speaks, ask what hour it is;
and the wind,
wave,
star,
bird,
clock will answer you:
It is the hour to be drunken!”
—Charles Baudelaire, Get Drunk
While Goethe showed the world it was possible to break
limits and extinguish one’s suffering through dedication, hard
work and perseverance in the creative process by obtaining
wisdom enough to balance and thus liberate ones repeated
suspension in zero spaces, Baudelaire showed the world other
ways of usurping limits in his confessions of humiliation,
debauchery and perennial residence with altered perceptions
within one’s creative space. From excessive drinking, to
smoking opium and hash, he was the first poet to so lavishly
and openly submit his private dirt to the pressure of the most
meticulous art. Baudelaire as the original beatnik, some one
hundred years before the Beatniks were—intoxication and
creation were his openly declared modus operandi. One could
say, he shamelessly opened the world to artistic hedonism, or
perhaps, self-medicated in a courage-less attempt to escape and
liberate himself. He is credited with coining the term modernité
(modernity) to designate the fleeting, ephemeral experience
of life in an urban metropolis, and the responsibility art has to
capture that experience, “By modernity I mean the transitory,
the fugitive, the contingent which make up one half of art, the
126
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part II — The Arts
other being the eternal and the immutable.”127
Baudelaire begins his famous essay “The Painter of
Modern Life” with a general theory of Beauty. His idea is
that Beauty has two elements: one is “eternal and invariable,”
and the other is “a relative circumstantial element”—an
element that goes by a series of aliases: “contemporaneity,
fashion, morality, passion.” As a theory, it does not arrest
one immediately. But with this theory Baudelaire is doing
something unusual to the history of aesthetics. The shift is in
how he sketches the relationship between the two elements
of beauty. It used to be that they happily existed beside each
other, the eternal and the everyday. But no, he argues. If you
want the eternal at all then the only route to it will be through
the banal and ubiquitous quotidian, through the everyday
dresses and make-up and sex lives of one’s era. This is the
source of his strange uniqueness: this assertion that the only
metaphysical art is a sketched picture of modern manners, as
in the engravings of Constantin Guys, or in his own writing: all
paintings of “the fleeting moment and of all that it suggests of
the eternal.”128 There is nothing more profound, in Baudelaire’s
revolution, than surfaces. And the closest surface is the map of
one’s own feelings. Humiliation, in other words, is the point at
which Baudelaire discovers his own portal into the eternal.129
In addition, Baudelaire introduced the world to symbolism
in literature which would influence the literary art for the
century to come. In Roberto Calasso’s recently published work,
La Folie Baudelaire, he begins with his definition of Baudelaire’s
modern condition. “In Baudelaire’s time, thinkers were obliged
Baudelaire, Charles, and Jonathan Mayne. The Painter of Modern Life, and
Other Essays. London: Phaidon, 1964. Print.
128
Thirwell, Adam. “How Baudelaire Revolutionized Modern Literature.” New
Republic 21 Feb. 2013: n. pag. Web. 21 March 2014.
129
Ibid.
127
A Synoptic Archeology of the Poetry-Poets
127
to commit an ‘infinite sin’. . . : to interpret infinitely, without a
primum and without an end, in unceasing, sudden, shattered,
and recursive motion.” This infinite interpretation, he argues,
was the new Parisian atmosphere—and it was Baudelaire’s
personal territory: “The real modernity that takes shape in
Baudelaire is this hunt for images, without beginning or
end, goaded by the ‘demon of analogy.’ ” And the reason why
interpretation is infinite, argues Calasso, why this hunt for
images and analogies goes on forever, is that sometime in the
nineteenth century in Paris it became apparent that there was
now no canon against which interpretations could be defined.
There was no orthodoxy. “And perhaps never as in Baudelaire,
in the graphs of his nervous reactions, was that situation so
manifest.” This, concludes Calasso, is the secret of Baudelaire’s
continuing shock value: “It is not something that concerns
the power or the perfection of form. It concerns sensibility.”130
Baudelaire was the most sensitive instrument for recording the
modern condition of total semantic confusion.131
Semantic confusion will eventually become the
cornerstone of the contemporary novel that in the century
which follows him, usurps poetry. This, perhaps is where
he creates the paradigmatic shift. Not surprisingly, one of
Baudelaire’s last incomplete projects was a novel. In 1852,
writing to his editor Auguste Poulet-Malassis, he declared:
“I am decided from now on to remain apart from all human
polemic, and decided more than ever to pursue the superior
dream of the application of metaphysics to the novel.”
For Baudelaire, the novel was the natural successor to his
Calasso, Roberto, and Jean-Paul Manganaro. La Folie Baudelaire. Paris:
Gallimard, 2011. Print
131 Thirwell, Adam. “How Baudelaire Revolutionized Modern Literature.” New
Republic 21 Feb. 2013: n. pag. Web. 21 March 2014.
130
128
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part II — The Arts
inventions in the art of poetry. Two years later, in 1854,
Baudelaire admonished his friend, the novelist Champfleury,
that “the Novel is an art more subtle and more beautiful than
the others, it is not a belief, no more than Art itself.”
As the young up and coming novelist Adam Thirwell
points out, “All his paradoxes are still here. The metaphysical
is still a problem for the novel, and so is the investigation into
the limits of humiliation. They may even be the same thing.
For the deep problem is still the problem of writing a kind of
confession, a kind of truth. And the question is, how do you do
this better than Baudelaire?”132
By turning the banality of everyday into art and exposing
the world—forcing observation on humanities dirty devices
and habits, Baudelaire shifted the tone of the times, still
influential to date.
And Baudelaire said, Yes, Goethe, lets look inside the
individual, but in order to do so, we need visuals of the
mundane surface –with added methodical storytelling, we
need poetic prose, the novel.
5.4.3 William Blake
I must Create a System, or be enslav’d by another Man’s. I
will not Reason & Compare; my business is to Create.133
In the line above, written in 1804, some 210 years ago,
William Blake summons for what we call here, the creation
of Fictive World Formulae. In his The Marriage of Heaven and
Hell etched between 1790 and 1793, he invents his own including
many of the basic religious ideas developed in his major
prophecies. Blake analyzes the development of organized
Ibid.
Blake, William, and Geoffrey Keynes. Jerusalem; the Emanation of the Giant
Albion. 1804. Printed by W. Blake. Clairvaux, France: Trianon; Distributed by
B. Quaritch, London, 1974. Print.
132
133
A Synoptic Archeology of the Poetry-Poets
129
religion as a perversion of ancient visions:
The ancient Poets animated all sensible objects with Gods
or Geniuses, calling them by the names and adorning them
with the properties of woods, rivers, mountains, lakes, cities,
nations, and whatever their enlarged & numerous senses
could perceive. And particularly they studied the genius
of each city & country, placing it under its mental deity;
Till a system was formed, which some took advantage of &
enslav’d the vulgar by attempting to realize or abstract the
mental deities from their objects: thus began Priesthood;
Choosing forms of worship from poetic tales. And at length
they pronounc’d that the Gods had order’d such things. Thus
men forgot that All deities reside in the human breast.
The “system” or organized religion, according to Blake,
keeps man from perceiving the spiritual in the physical. The gods
are seen as separate from man, and an elite race of priests is
developed to approach the gods. Instead of looking for God on
remote altars, Blake warns, man should look within, perhaps to
the place we call here, a zero space.
Blake’s poem satirizes oppressive authority of church
and state. His minor prophecies are more than political
commentaries but rather analyses of the universal forces at
work when repression and revolution clash. The “just man” has
been turned away from the institutions of church and state,
and in his place are fools and hypocrites who preach law and
order but create chaos. Blake claimed that those who proclaim
restrictive moral rules and oppressive laws as “goodness”
are in themselves evil. Hence to counteract this repression,
Blake announces that he is of the “Devil’s Party” that will
advocate freedom of energy and satisfied desire. Not unlike
Friedrich Nietzsche’s work, Beyond Good and Evil, which he
would published almost one hundred years later, Blake’s The
“Proverbs of Hell” are constructed to shock the reader out of
his commonplace notion of what is good and what is evil:
130
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part II — The Arts
Prisons are built with stones of Law,
Brothels with bricks of Religion.
The pride of the peacock is the glory of God.
The lust of the goat is the bounty of God.
The wrath of the lion is the wisdom of God.
The nakedness of woman is the work of God.
According to Blake, the oppressive nature of church
and state has created repulsive prisons and brothels. As well,
he claims sexual energy is not an immanent “evil,” but the
restraint of that energy is. He believes the preachers of morality
fail to understand that God is in all things, including the sexual
nature of men and women, or what we established earlier with
Rilke’s poems, the creative nature. Blake is not advocating
moral and political anarchy, but a proper balance of energy and
its opposing force, reason. Reason, by Blake, is defined as “the
bound or outward Circumference of Energy.” The threshold
between pre-poiesis, (zero space), and poiesis, between the
mystic and the conscious calculated reason. Reason is a vital
and necessary force to define Energy, and “without contraries
is no progression,” Blake announced. The problem now is
that the forces of reason have predominated, and the forces of
energy must be let loose.
Compared with Beyond Good and Evil, Nietzsche exposes
the deficiencies of those usually called “philosophers” (as
opposed to Blake’s church and state or ruling political and
religious philosophies) and identifies the qualities of the “new
philosophers”: imagination, self-assertion, danger, originality,
and the creation of values, (Blake calls is ‘energy’). He then
contests some of the key presuppositions of the old philosophic
tradition like self-consciousness, knowledge, truth, and free will,
A Synoptic Archeology of the Poetry-Poets
131
(Blake’s reason), explaining them as inventions of the moral
consciousness. In their place he offers the will to power, (Blake’s
forces of energy), as an explanation of all behavior; this ties into
his perspective of life, which he regards as beyond good and evil,
denying a universal morality for all human beings.
This is where the two diverge: for Blake, reason is a ‘vital
Circumference’ which can define the forces of energy, the one
can not live without the Other. He believes a balance is needed.
Nietzsche obliterates limits altogether.
Religion and the master and slave moralities feature
prominently as Nietzsche re-evaluates deeply held humanistic
beliefs, portraying even domination, appropriation and injury
to the weak as not universally objectionable. Blake, on the
other hand, abhorred slavery and believed in racial and sexual
equality—he lived in a suspension of judgment as an embraced
lifestyle, balancing it through his creations. Several of his
poems and paintings express a notion of universal humanity:
“As all men are alike (tho’ infinitely various)”. In his poem,
“The Little Black Boy”, narrated by a black child, white and
black bodies alike are described as shaded groves or clouds,
which exist only until one learns “to bear the beams of love”:
When I from black and he from white cloud free,
And round the tent of God like lambs we joy:
Ill shade him from the heat till he can bear,
To lean in joy upon our fathers knee.
And then I’ll stand and stroke his silver hair,
And be like him and he will then love me.
132
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part II — The Arts
Nietzsche, on the contrary, in his work The Will to Power134
declares, “woman! One-half of mankind is weak, typically
sick, changeable, inconstant... she needs a religion of weakness
that glorifies being weak, loving, and being humble as divine:
or better, she makes the strong weak—she rules when she
succeeds in overcoming the strong... Woman has always
conspired with the types of decadence, the priests, against the
“powerful”, the “strong”, the men..”
Nietzsche proclaimed the sky is the limit and judged
everything and everyone underneath it, though he remained
within limits of generalized judgment of the outside world to
which he took very little part. “To Generalize is to be an Idiot,”
Blake declared. If we pour him through the sieve of Blake’s
psychology, we might distinguish between the two divergences
through their empirical perspectives: Nietzsche was an erudite
scholar, Blake a trained apprentice in the craft of engravings
and a painter who also wrote poetry and was self-taught
though experience and observation. Nietzsche was a solitary,
socially awkward hermit who read, wrote, and walked alone.
Blake was married for 45 years to a dear companion who
encouraged and supported him through his craft throughout
his life and learned the art of engraving to help him with his
work. He engaged the world and loved his family. Nietzsche
shut himself up and his sexuality or physical/sensual awareness
is a mystery still explored to present day.135 “Organized
religion”, according to Blake, “keeps man from perceiving the
spiritual in the physical”. Was Nietzsche trying to organize a
religion to claim himself the superman creator of his own new
134
Nietzsche, Friedrich Wilhelm, Walter Arnold Kaufmann, and R. J.
Hollingdale. The Will to Power. New York: Random House, 1967. Print.
135
Köhler, Joachim. Zarathustra’s Secret: The Interior Life of Friedrich Nietzsche.
New Haven: Yale UP, 2002. Print.
A Synoptic Archeology of the Poetry-Poets
133
religion or transvaluation of new values?136 Replacing one set
of values with another—the Übermensch (superman) was to
be the meaning of the earth and Nietzsche admonishes his
audience to ignore those who promise other-worldly hopes
in order to draw them away from the earth. A new God, who
doesn’t promise paradise or afterlife. The turn away from the
earth is prompted, he says, by a dissatisfaction with life, a
dissatisfaction that causes one to create another world in which
those who made one unhappy in this life are tormented. The
Übermensch is not driven into other worlds away from this
one. But are not the faculties of imagination, originality and
creativity, (those qualities what Nietzsche identified as the
qualities needed for the “new philosophers”) used for the very
function of creating other worlds in our imaginations? And
was Nietzsche really engaging the world and not driven away,
escaping into his little isolated castle in the sky? Nietzsche
desired a ‘superman’ — that is, for a new human who was to
be neither master nor slave; he praised the ecstatic and creative
self, with the artist as his prototype who could say, ‘Yes’ to the
self-creation of a new world on the basis of nothing; Blake said:
I must Create a System, or be enslav’d by another Man’s. I
will not Reason & Compare; my business is to Create
As Blake’s work remained in obscurity until the mid1900s, it is highly unlikely that Nietzsche knew of his
existence. Blake’s complete poetry, however, is festooned
with cross-references to the same idea voiced differently in
Nietzsche. Until they diverge. While Nietzsche denies a limit
on universal morality, the other less erudite and living wholly
in the imagination, self-assertion, danger, originality, and the
136
Nietzsche, Friedrich Wilhelm. The Antichrist. New York: Arno, 1972. Print.
134
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part II — The Arts
creation of values, that Nietzsche proclaimed as the new way
forward and Blake simply called ‘energy’, recognized that
Nietzsche’s idea of what he called reason, self-consciousness,
knowledge, truth, and free will was not an invention of moral
consciousness as Nietzsche declared, but rather a vital force
needed to define the other. While Blake sought to embrace
the Other, Nietzsche sought absolute isolation. The two were
simply parts of the whole. Blake was free, and recognized the
necessity for balance, yet the philosopher got lost in another
absolute and proclaimed domination, appropriation and injury
to the weak as not universally objectionable. If he couldn’t find
love for himself, who else could he find it for? He had a taste
of the other side of reason and couldn’t find a way to live it—so
he sent it into exile like his predecessor, Plato.
Perhaps here we may pour Nietzsche’s biographical, sexual
(creative) perspective through the Blakeian sieve once more
and consider Blakes comment in his Proverbs of Hell:
Prudence is a rich ugly old maid courted by Incapacity.
He who desires but acts not, breeds pestilence.
While Nietzsche had intensely insightful ideas regarding
performance and poetry in his DNA, his philosophical and
political conceptions could only breed what would eventually
be called Fascism led by a man named Hitler. What he missed
was what Blake declared when he said that sexual energy is
not an immanent “evil,” but the restraint of that energy is. In
the end, perhaps it is fair to say that looking beyond good
and evil has its limits. Blake understood that a century before
Nietzsche. Without Others to share oneself: domination,
appropriation and injury may seem justified, or as Jim
Morrison once chanted:
People are strange when you’re a stranger
A Synoptic Archeology of the Poetry-Poets
135
Faces look ugly when you’re alone,
Women seem wicked when you’re unwanted,
Streets are uneven when you’re down.
And Blake said, Yes, Baudelaire, we certainly need visuals,
and a story to coincide, but mostly we need to find balance
within the forces that bring us to create, and in a more sublime
way then debauchery, or how can we move forward?
5.4.4 Emily Dickinson
“Soto”- Explore
Thyself
Therein - Thyself
shall find
The Undiscovered
Continent :
No Settler - had
the Mind.137
Sōtō Zen or the Sōtō school (曹洞宗 Sōtō-shū) is the
largest of the three traditional sects of Zen in Japanese
Buddhism. It emphasizes Shikantaza, meditation with no
objects, anchors, or content. The meditator strives to be aware
of the stream of thoughts, allowing them to arise and pass away
without interference.138
Although Emily was writing this poem to her brother,
Austin, it embodies the crux of her entire work of almost 1800
poems, all of which were written in solitude, without any
137
Dickinson, Emily, 1830-1886. A. (Emily) note/poem to Austin [Dickinson]
[ca.1864] Pencil; 1p. MS Am 1118.5 (B19). Houghton Library, Harvard
University, Cambridge, Mass.
138
“Soto.” Wikipedia. Wikimedia Foundation, 28 Apr. 2014. Web. 15 May 2014.
136
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part II — The Arts
sincere desire to be known by the outside world. She alone
negates the second realm of Platonic poiesis by example:
willing to die without being recognized as the poet she would
posthumously become – the embodiment of the pure poetic
soul, without need for fame.
Born and died fourteen years before Friedrich Nietzsche,
Emily Dickinson demonstrates for the world sublime
overcoming of isolation through one’s creation, and more,
creation for creations sake. But unlike Nietzsche, she hadn’t any
will to power, to become superwoman, she just was, sublime
existence. Or in the words of Harold Bloom, “The genius of
isolation is very rare: no other poet...seems so separate from us
as Dickinson...We are still in the apprentice state in learning to
read (her) poetry, primarily because of her authentic difficulty.
She is frequently more allusive then we tend to recognize.”139
Emily alone, embodies living in a zero space, and mastering it,
soberly, without ever going mad. “No one can read Dickinson
long and deeply without being confronted by her extraordinary
self-reliance as a poet, woman and thinker. The expression of
that self-trust is a pride in her own poetic authority, and in her
highly individual spiritual autonomy.”140
This Consciousness that is aware
Of Neighbors and the Sun
Will be the one aware of Death
And that itself alone
Is traversing the interval
Experience between
And most profound experiment
Appointed unto Men —
How adequate unto itself
139
Bloom, Harold. “Din: Lustre 9.” Genius: A Mosaic of One Hundred
Exemplary Creative Minds. New York: Warner, 2002. 345. Print.
140
Ibid.
A Synoptic Archeology of the Poetry-Poets
137
It’s properties shall be
Itself unto itself and none
Shall make discovery.
Adventure most unto itself
The Soul condemned to be —
Attended by a single Hound
It’s own identity.
In her “Circumference” she kept intimate friends through
epistolary communication. Through her letters, Dickinson
reminds her correspondents that their broken worlds are not
a mere chaos of fragments. Behind the seeming fragments
of her short statements lies the invitation to remember the
world in which each correspondent shares a certain and rich
knowledge with the other. They alone know the extent of their
connections; the friendship has given them the experiences
peculiar to the relation. She asks her reader to complete the
connection her words only imply—to round out the context
from which the allusion is taken, to take the part and imagine
a whole.141 Imagination is the key to her comprehension of
existence—and in it, the interconnectedness of all things
unseen or spoken exist.
I dwell in Possibility A fairer House than Prose More numerous of Windows Superior - for Doors Of Chambers as the Cedars Impregnable of eye And for an everlasting
Roof
The Gambrels of the Sky Of Visitors - the fairest “Emily Dickinson.” Poetry Foundation. Poetry Foundation, n.d. Web. 12
May 2014.
141
138
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part II — The Arts
For Occupation - This The spreading wide my
narrow Hands
To gather Paradise Dickinson crafted a new type of persona for the first
person. Her speakers are “sharp-sighted observers who see
the inescapable limitations of their societies as well as their
imagined and imaginable escapes.”142 In these imagined
escapes, the notion of our Fictive World Formulae are once
again evoked. As Dickinson wrote in a poem dated to 1875,
“Escape is such a thankful Word.” In fact, her references to
“escape” occur primarily in reference to the soul. In her scheme
of redemption, salvation depended upon freedom. The poem
ends with praise for the “trusty word” of escape. Contrasting
a vision of “the savior” with the condition of being “saved,”
Dickinson says there is clearly one choice: “And that is why I
lay my Head / Opon this trusty word -” She invites the reader
to compare one incarnation with another. Upending the
Christian language about the “word,” Dickinson substitutes her
own agency for the incarnate savior. She will choose “escape.”143
The Soul has Bandaged moments When too appalled to stir She feels some ghastly Fright
come up
And stop to look at her Salute her, with long fingers Caress her freezing hair Sip, Goblin, from the very lips
142
143
Ibid.
Ibid.
A Synoptic Archeology of the Poetry-Poets
139
The Lover - hovered - o’er Unworthy, that a thought so
mean
Accost a Theme - so - fair The soul has moments of escape When bursting all the doors She dances like a Bomb, abroad,
And swings opon the Hours,
As do the Bee - delirious borne Long Dungeoned from his Rose Touch Liberty - then know no
more But Noone, and Paradi s e
The Soul’s retaken moments When, Felon led along,
With (irons) - shackles on the plumed
feet,
And (rivets) - staples, in the song,
The Horror welcomes her,
again,
These, are not brayed
of Tongue In The Undiscovered Continent Dickinson saw the mind
and spirit as tangible visitable places that for much of her life
she lived within; her zero spaces. Often, this intensely private
place is referred to as the “undiscovered continent” and the
“landscape of the spirit” and embellished with nature imagery.
At other times, the imagery is darker and forbidding—castles
or prisons, complete with corridors and rooms—to create a
dwelling place of “oneself ” where one resides with one’s other
140
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part II — The Arts
selves. “Dickinson reaches the anguish of a sublime transport
through pain...a master of every negative affect: fury, erotic
destitution, a very private knowledge of God’s exile from
himself. Dickinson is so original a genius that she alters one’s
sense of what poetic genius can be.”144
An example of these notions: “Me from Myself – to banish
–/ Had I Art –/ Impregnable my Fortress/ Unto All Heart –/
But since myself—assault Me –/ How have I peace/ Except
by subjugating/ Consciousness./ And since We’re mutual
Monarch/ How this be/ Except by Abdication –/ Me – of Me?”
Her economy of words form a new style of writing
altogether, never before executed with such sublime acuity.
You can feel the sound of the words – the impact of the sounds
and the blank spaces in-between seem more important than
the meaning itself, leaving immense various possibilities to
interpret between the blanks—projecting your self into them,
and understanding how you personally see life in general in the
in-between. Dickinson wrote short lyrics that were precise in
diction, free in form, and vivid in imagery, remarkably like the
new poetic form of imagism that would come a half a century
later to dominate the early twentieth century when modernism
was taking over as literary movement. In that sense, she was
more a modern poet than Romantic or Victorian, although
writing in isolation, she herself never suspected that her
unconventional poems might foreshadow a new literary
epoch. “She experimented with expression in order to free it
from conventional restraints. To make the abstract tangible,
to define meaning without confining it, to inhabit a house
that never became a prison, Dickinson created in her writing
a distinctively elliptical language for expressing what was
144
Bloom, Harold. “Din: Lustre 9.” Genius: A Mosaic of One Hundred
Exemplary Creative Minds. New York: Warner, 2002. 345. Print.
A Synoptic Archeology of the Poetry-Poets
141
possible but not yet realized. She saw poetry as a double-edged
sword. While it liberated the individual, it as readily left him
ungrounded.” 145
In addition to predating the modernist literary period in
style and form, Emily Dickinson’s use of difference uncannily
anticipates Jacques Derrida’s idea of différance and of negative
deconstructive interpretation. Using Derrida’s language, one
might say of Dickinson’s poems generally that they do not
acknowledge a center of meaning. “We see—Comparatively,”146
Dickinson wrote, one hundred and one years before Derrida
first uses the term différance in his 1963 paper “Cogito et
histoire de la folie”, and her poems demonstrate that assertion.
In the world of Dickinsonian poetry, definition proceeds via
comparison. One cannot say directly what is; essence remains
unnamed and unnameable: “‘Hope’ is the thing with feathers,”
“Renunciation—is a piercing Virtue,” “Remorse—is Memory—
awake,” or “Eden is that old fashioned House.” “Dickinson’s
metaphors observe no firm distinction between tenor and
vehicle. Defining one concept in terms of another produces a
new layer of meaning in which both terms are changed. Her
vocabulary circles around transformation, often ending before
change is completed. The final lines of her poems might well
be defined by their inconclusiveness: the “I guess” of “You’re
right - ’the way is narrow’“; a direct statement of slippage—
”and then - it doesn’t stay”—in “I prayed, at first, a little Girl.”
Dickinson’s endings are frequently open. In this world of
comparison, extremes are powerful. There are many negative
definitions and sharp contrasts. While the emphasis on the
“Emily Dickinson.” Poetry Foundation. Poetry Foundation, n.d. Web. 12
May 2014.
146
Dickinson, Emily, 1830-1886. Poems: Packet XVI, Fascicle 25 (part).
Includes 14 poems, written in ink, dated ca. 1862.
145
142
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part II — The Arts
outer limits of emotion may well be the most familiar form of
the Dickinsonian extreme, it is not the only one. Dickinson’s
use of synecdoche is yet another version. The part that is taken
for the whole functions by way of contrast. The specific detail
speaks for the thing itself, but in its speaking, it reminds the
reader of the difference between the minute particular and
what it represents. Opposition frames the system of meaning
in Dickinson’s poetry: the reader knows what is, by what is
not.”147 Otherwise stated, Derridian différance, a century before
deconstruction or postmodernism.
As living personification of her own descriptions,
Dickinson refused to be restricted by the principles expected
of her. In a “rebellion” letter to her friend Leonard Humphrey,
she wrote, “How lonely this world is growing, something so
desolate creeps over the spirit and we don’t know it’s name, and
it won’t go away, either Heaven is seeming greater, or Earth a
great deal more small, or God is more “Our Father,” and we
feel our need increased. Christ is calling everyone here, all my
companions have answered, even my darling Vinnie believes
she loves, and trusts him, and I am standing alone in rebellion,
and growing very careless. Abby, Mary, Jane, and farthest of all
my Vinnie have been seeking, and they all believe they have
found; I can’t tell you what they have found, but they think it is
something precious. I wonder if it is? —Dickinson’s question
frames the époque. Within her life she determined what
was irrefutably precious: not religion, not fame, legacy, nor
fortune or desire, but poetry. Or rather, submerged in poiesis
from breath to breath, day to day, year to year she traversed
three periods of literary output: romantic, modernist, and
postmodernistb— projecting us further still into the dawning
of this new era.
“Emily Dickinson.” Poetry Foundation. Poetry Foundation, n.d. Web. 12
May 2014.
147
A Synoptic Archeology of the Poetry-Poets
143
And Emily said, Yes, William, we need to find sober presence
within ourselves, before we can move forward: and I did
that, and it was sublime, now what?
And Samuel said, Well done, Emily, perhaps now we need
to describe it for everyone in such a way that they too can
experience it—otherwise, what’s the point?
5.5 On the “thing-in-itself”
Samuel Beckett
“Joyce, who was a kind of older brother to Beckett, and
Proust, upon whom Beckett wrote a remarkable early
monograph, between them would seem to have completed the
development of the European novel as an art form. Ulysses,
Finnegans Wake, and In Search of Lost Time had taken
tradition to its breaking point.. Beckett’s trilogy—Molloy,
Malone Dies, The Unamable—manages an authentic step
beyond, and nothing so inaccurately termed Postmodernism
has caught up with Beckett. The theatre of Ibsen, Pirandello,
and Brecht also comes to its finality in Beckett’s three great
plays: Waiting for Godot, Endgame, and Krapp’s Last Tape.
Beyond Beckett, you curve back to the literary past, whatever
your intentions. He represents a perfection of what perhaps
had begun in Flaubert, and which had no future beyond How
It Is and Krapp’s Last Tape.”148
If Dickinson managed to find sober presence within
her isolated world — poetic wisdom via intense individual
meditation and reflection, than Samuel Beckett demonstrated
the process one must traverse in arriving there amidst
destruction, suffering and pain throughout the internal, and
external world. The two poets lived two very different lifestyles,
Bloom, Harold. “Binah: Lustre 5.” Genius: A Mosaic of One Hundred
Exemplary Creative Minds. New York: Warner, 2002. 345. Print.
148
144
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part II — The Arts
one sheltered and safe, cast away from the world alone in her
room in the woods of New England, the other up front and
center in the stark reality of the human situation in Europe –in
one of the most violent centuries the world has ever known. In
his resilience, Samuel Beckett looked straight into the horror
without yielding, and created in it.
In Imagination dead imagine (1965) Beckett executes a
style divulging a crossing into the imagination. Commanding
the mood and providing precise indications, the narrator
compels the visualization of an image and then dismembers it.
By describing his fantastic image: a white vault within a white
rotunda housing two white beings lying within a three-footdiameter circle – Beckett gives birth to a living zero space. The
setting of Imagination dead imagine, a white enclosure, has
surfaced in Beckett’s fiction from Murphy to Ping, but the style
of this piece marks a new shift for Beckett, covering familiar
ground in an unfamiliar way. He must develop a language that
embodies a paradox—a picture of a void, a zero space. Here,
once again we recall Nietzsche’s comment:
..nothing can be more obvious than that the poet is only a
poet because of the fact that he sees himself surrounded by
shapes which live and act in front of him and into whose
innermost being he gazes. Through some peculiar weakness
in our modern talent, we are inclined to imagine that
primitive aesthetic phenomenon in too complicated and
abstract a manner.149
Clearly, “that primitive aesthetic phenomenon” was
not “too complicated a manner”, for Beckett. The bodies,
in a yin yang, womb-setting: sleep-like state, experiencing
149
Ibid.
A Synoptic Archeology of the Poetry-Poets
145
alternations of intense temperature shifts between hot and
cold, light and darkness—a mimetic re-creation of an abstract
space of creation. Similarly in Molloy, he ‘was virtually bereft
of feeling, not to say of consciousness, and drowned in a
deep and merciful torpor shot with brief abominable gleams
. . .’ (Molloy, 1951). In his following work, Malone thinks he
may be ‘in a kind of vault’ (Malone dies, 1951), and talks of
coming ‘back to this foul little den all dirty white and vaulted’.
As Beckett proceeds through time and experience, his work
approaches—and then moves directly into a zero space.
The vault in Imagination Dead Imagine, when rapped,
gives ‘a ring as in the imagination the ring of bone.’ Similarly,
Malone wonders if ‘these six planes that enclose me are of
solid bone’ (Malone dies). [Bone, and humans are made up
of 93% stardust150, a universal-tangible of which humankind
is created.] Echoing this, and anticipating the still figures in
Imagination, The Unnamable (1953) sees himself as ‘a head, but
solid, solid bone, and you imbedded in it, like a fossil in the
rock’. The narrator of How It Is (1961) suggests a comparison
between a white enclosure and the inside of a head:
the voice quaqua on all sides then within in the little
vault empty
closed eight planes bone-white if there were a light a
tiny flame all
would be white ten words fifteen words like a fume of
sighs when
the panting stops then the storm the breath token of
life part three
and last it must be nearly ended.151
150
“How Much of the Human Body Is Made up of Stardust?” Physics Central.
American Physical Society, 2014. Web. 2 May 2014.
151
Beckett, Samuel. How It Is. New York: Grove, 1964. Print.
146
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part II — The Arts
The concept of Murphy’s mind, the light and dark imagery
of the plays, the skull-like set of Endgame, the womb and tomb
imagery in the trilogy, the obsession with white in From an
Abandoned Work, and the couple from Enough intensifies in
focus as Beckett precises more expressions in pre-poetic zero
space.
The rotunda of Imagination Dead Imagine (1965) may
be classified as one of the items conceivable in the third zone
of Murphy’s mind, ‘a flux of forms’ where ‘there was nothing
but commotion and the pure forms of commotion’ (Murphy,
1938 ). Murphy, a character in one of Beckett’s initial works,
withdraws from the real world and tries to live in his mind,
which for him is a place. It is towards this place, which Beckett,
whether consciously or subconsciously, seems to be drawn in
his journey through the process of his creations. In this mental
area of commotion, ordinary space and time are destroyed
so that the two endpoints of a lifespan become one, and time
is stopped. In Imagination dead imagine life and death are
similarly fused: the creatures of the rotunda may be either
fetuses or dying bodies or both—the creative and destructive
space of the imagination.
Molloy seeks mental isolation comparable to Murphy’s and
his image for it seems to foreshadow the setting of Imagination:
‘I listen and the voice is of a world collapsing endlessly, a
frozen world . . . .’ The rotunda emerging from nothingness is
white; the characters appear frozen; and their world collapses
endlessly in cycles. The Viconian cycles discussed in Beckett’s
essay on Finnegans Wake may provide the model for this
vibration in a world of flux. Beckett, interpreting Joyce, shows
how Giambattista Vico devised his cyclic theory of history
from Giordano Bruno’s ideas on opposites:
A Synoptic Archeology of the Poetry-Poets
147
The maxima and minima of particular contraries are
one and indifferent. Minimal heat equals minimal cold.
Consequently transmutations are circular. The principle
(minimum) of one contrary takes its movement from the
principle (maximum) of another. Therefore not only do the
minima coincide with the minima, the
maxima with the maxima, but the minima with the
maxima in the succession of transmutations. Maximal speed
is a state of rest.152
We are quickly reminded here of Blake’s similar
comment that “without contraries is no progression.”—just as
opposition frames the system of meaning in Dickinson’s poems
which did not acknowledge a center of meaning, “We see—
Comparatively,”153 she declared.
Samuel Beckett was starkly aware of Giambattista Vico’s cyclic
theory of history which claims that history begins in a barbarism
of sense and ends in a barbarism of reflection. The barbarism of
reflection is a returned barbarism in which the common sense
established by religion through poetic wisdom (chapter 3.5) holding
a society together has been broken down by individual interests.
The interests are spurred because individuals each think according
to their own conceptual scheme without concern for the society,
which makes it barbaric. Perhaps it is fair to say, at this point in
his locale on the map of the literary individualism prompted by
Shakespeare some four hundred years earlier, Beckett recognized
the intense depth of individualism the world had effectuated in its
dualistic perspectives. We had, in fact, arrived in full force in Vico’s
notion of the barbarism of reflection, if such a thing were to exist.
Vico describes the returned barbarism in his New Science:
“such peoples [in the barbarism], like so many beasts, have
152
Beckett, Samuel. Dante ... Bruno. Vico ... Joyce. (In Transition, No. 16-17,
June 1929). Paris: n.p., 1929. Print.
153
Dickinson, Emily, 1830-1886. Poems: Packet XVI, Fascicle 25 (part).
Includes 14 poems, written in ink, dated ca. 1862.
148
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part II — The Arts
fallen into the custom of each man thinking only of his own
private interests and have reached the extreme delicacy, or
better of pride, in which like wild animals they bristle and lash
out at the slightest displeasure.”154 These private interests lead
into a civil war in which everyone betrays everyone else. This
takes humanity back to where it started — individual beasts
acting solely on their own individual passions. Not unlike
much of the world as we find it today, and certainly in the time
of Samuel Beckett — his life was almost concurrent with the
darkest and most brutalized century in recorded history: two
world wars, the horrors of Stalin, the Holocaust of Hitler, the
disastrous Great Leap of Mao, brutal colonial wars in Africa
and the protracted threat of atomic annihilation during the
Cold War.
Vico does not give a clear ethical position on what to do
in the face of the barbarism of reflection. He wrote a section
of the New Science called a Practic but decided not to include
it. While he didn’t favor established religion, he did recognize
the import of poetic wisdom holding a society together, in a
rhetorical sense. Clearly, Vico wanted his readers to recognize
this universal truth and appreciate a rhetorical rather than
literal approach to philosophy. Rhetoric |ˈretərik| noun, 1):
language designed to have a persuasive or impressive effect
on its audience. As discussed in chapter 3.5, Vico expanded
the Renaissance interpretation of poiēsis beyond the task of
imitatio natura (imitation of nature, or mimesis) and proposed
“we must participate in the process whereby individuals,
peoples, and entire cultures and societies figured their futures
through imaginative projections of their wills.”155 As well,
154
Vico, Giambattista. The New Science. Ithaca: Cornell UP, 1975. Print.
Price, David W. History Made, History Imagined: Contemporary Literature,
Poiesis, and the past. Urbana: University of Illinois, 1999. Print.
155
A Synoptic Archeology of the Poetry-Poets
149
Vico insisted it is the poetic, primitive mind that gives shape
to events; without such arranging, experience continues as
incoherent. A dreamscape. Giambattista Vico was convinced
that all of civilization becomes visible from this inceptive
poetic act: transcribing, organizing, adapting the irrational
dreamscape of past experiences into rational, coherent form.
Could it be that Beckett, whether consciously or unconsciously,
recognized that in order to re-render civilization visible anew,
we needed to dismember it to its most microscopic universal
zero space in order that we might then further display “the
fictive as the third ground between truth and fable that we
properly see as being opposed to one another.”156?
Beckett may have realized the resounding path he
was prodding. He stripped stages and created nameless
narrators shorthand for everywhere and everyone – the aged,
bewildered, agonized narrators of his novels, are regarded as
the proper artistic expression of a world bereft of transcendent
hope, without God, morality, value or even the solace of a
stable selfhood.
Before writing Waiting for Godot, Samuel Beckett writes
in a letter to an old confidant, Thomas MacGreevy, in 1948,
“I see a little clearly at last what my writing is about, and feel
I have perhaps 10 years courage and energy to see the job
done.”157 Waiting for Godot is full of suggestion, but can not be
simplified to precise metaphorical correlation. Beckett details
it as ‘striving all the time to avoid definition’, “The play will not
be pinned down or located, a clear meaning will not arrive for
us just as Godot does not arrive for the characters, Vladimir
Ibid.
Beckett, Samuel, Martha Fehsenfeld, Lois More. Overbeck, George Craig,
and Daniel Gunn. The Letters of Samuel Beckett. 1941-1956. Cambridge, UK:
Cambridge UP, 2011. Print.
156
157
150
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part II — The Arts
and Estragon. They can be confused and uncertain about
where they are, where they were and where they will be, and
the audience, by extension, can feel bewildered by the elusive
themes of a play which, while orbiting around philosophical
and religious issues, tends to keep them at a distance, to keep
us in a state of interpretative suspension.”158 Beckett was
blurring the binaries.
To chain Waiting for Godot too carefully to the religious
allegorical may repress its indicative power, though there
are certainly philosophical, psychological and theological
dimensions to Godot’s non-arrival: “He can be seen to stand
in for all striving, all hope, the tendency for us to live our lives
geared towards some prospective attainment. Most human
beings live in a constant state of yearning (low- or high-level)
and fix onto some hope or desire for the future: the holiday
just round the corner, the right job, the well-earned retirement.
Once that hope is achieved or desire fulfilled, it moves on
to some other object. As Beckett puts it in Proust, ‘We are
disappointed at the nullity of what we are pleased to call
attainment. But what is attainment? The identification of the
subject with the object of his desire? The subject has died – and
perhaps many times – on the way.’ According to the philosophy
advanced in Beckett’s early essay (heavily influenced, as it
is, by the nineteenth-century German philosopher Arthur
Schopenhauer), the self is fragmented and distended through
time and is better understood as a series of selves, comparable
to Bergson’s theories of multiplicities159. [Also homologous to
Dickinson, through her letters, reminding her correspondents
that their broken worlds are not a mere chaos of fragments.
158
McDonald, Ronan. The Cambridge Introduction to Samuel Beckett.
Cambridge, UK: Cambridge UP, 2006. Print.
159
Deleuze, Gilles 1966. Bergsonism. Trans. Hugh Tomlinson and Barbara
Habberjam. NY: Zone, 1991
A Synoptic Archeology of the Poetry-Poets
151
Behind the seeming fragments of her short statements lies the
invitation to remember the world in which each correspondent
shares a certain and rich knowledge with the other.] Once
one ambition or urge is fulfilled, desire shifts promiscuously
on to another prospective attainment. Ultimately it cannot be
fulfilled: ‘whatever the object, our thirst for posses-sion is, by
definition, insatiable’. Life then becomes about a vain, futureorientated expectation of a Godot who does not arrive. We fill
our days with routines and habits in expectation of this arrival,
rarely stopping to confront the desperate situation in which we
live — the scarcity and provisionality of fulfillment, the terrible
destructiveness of time, the inevitability of death from the very
moment of birth (‘the grave-digger puts on the forceps’).”160
Preceding his trilogy in 1955, Beckett went on a visit to
his mother in Dublin where he had a ‘vision’ or a ‘revelation’
of literary purpose which marks the divide between his
prose – third-person, erudite, controlled work — and the
dwindled, bewildered, first-person story-telling of the trilogy
and beyond: “Molloy and the others came to me the day I
became aware of my own folly. Only then did I begin to write
the things I feel.” 161 The key Beckettian principle, which will
lead to the ever greater diminution and ‘purification’ of his
work as he gets older, is that expressive language is not to be
trusted, that shape and silence are where artistic impact lies.
(Again, homologous to Dickinson’s stress on the impact of
the sounds and the blank spaces in-between as seemingly more
important than the meaning itself, leaving immense various
possibilities to interpret between the blanks). As early as
1937, however, long before his post-war revelation, Beckett
160
Ibid.
Beckett, Samuel, Martha Fehsenfeld, Lois More. Overbeck, George Craig,
and Daniel Gunn. The Letters of Samuel Beckett. 1941-1956. Cambridge, UK:
Cambridge UP, 2011. Print.
161
152
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part II — The Arts
evidenced his disaffection with language, his impulse to
encounter revelation in the spaces in between words. In a
letter to Axel Kaun, he speaks of his crusade to pierce holes in
language: ‘more and more my own language appears to me like
a veil that must be torn apart in order to get at the things (or
the Nothingness) behind it’. “..the most expressive moments in
his plays often occur in the pauses and silences, indicating, at
turns, repression, fear, anticipation or horrified in articulacy.
This pressing reality of the silence is, as Beckett put it,‘pouring
into this play like water into a sinking ship’. Much of what
Beckett has to say in his drama lies in what is omitted, when
his characters cannot muster the words or the play-acting to
forestall the encroaching silence, or the ‘dead voices’ that haunt
(the characters) when they stop speaking.”162
In a frequently quoted interview with Israel Shenker,
Beckett announced, “The difference is that Joyce was a superb
manipulator of material — perhaps the greatest. […] the kind
of work I do is one in which I’m not master of my material.
The more Joyce knows, the more he could. He’s tending
towards omniscience and omnipotence as an artist. I’m
working with impotence, ignorance. I don’t think ignorance
has been exploited in the past. There seems to be a kind of
aesthetic axiom that expression is achievement - must be
an achievement. My little exploration is that whole zone of
being which has always been set aside by artists as something
unusable (a zero space?) — as something by definition
incompatible with art.”163
As he proceeds with the ‘intent of undoing’:
theconnections to a recognizable, biographical world become
162
McDonald, Ronan. The Cambridge Introduction to Samuel Beckett.
Cambridge, UK: Cambridge UP, 2006. Print.
163
Shenker, Israel ‘Moody Man of Letters’ [interview], New York Times, 6 May
1956; rep. in Lawrence Graver & Raymond Federman, eds., Critical Heritage,
London: Routledge & Kegan Paul 1979
A Synoptic Archeology of the Poetry-Poets
153
more attenuated as the drafts proceed and Beckett works his
way slowly into creating a creation space, while at the same
time, attempting to bring the spectators into it with him. As
if to say, (whether knowing or not): repartir à zero, (press the
reset button). Though at the same time, he humbly admitted
fear in doing so: after all, if history is cyclical as Vico suggested,
what would be the point? In his work, Endgame, (1957) the
pastoral solace of Nature has gone, but the blind destruction
of natural change and decay has not. Perhaps a preemptive
vision of the ecological destruction man had begun. This is
why the prospect of evolution starting all over again is so
galling. First, a flea or a crab louse appears in Clov’s trousers.
Hamm declares, ‘But humanity might start from there all over
again! Catch him, for the love of God!’ He strives to kill it with
insecticide, but realizes that it may simply be ‘laying doggo’ : to
remain unrecognized (for a long time).
Theodore W. Adorno, German philosopher and critic
declared in his essay on Endgame that it was ‘drama in
opposition to ontology’, for dramatizing an incoherent
situation, untranslatable into the language of rationality
and conceptuality: “Understanding Endgame can only be
understanding why it cannot be understood, concretely
reconstructing the coherent meaning of its incoher-ence.”164
Rather than simply asserting a lack of ‘meaning’, the play
actually demonstrates it: the infinity, nothingness and
potentialities existing in the writer’s zero space. This is why
Adorno held that the play was so much more powerful
than the existentialist philosophy with which Beckett was
sometimes associated. In abstract philosophy, what we
understand only occurs at the level of complexity and ideas.
Endgame claws at deeper and darker levels of experience,
Adorno, Theodor W. Trying to Understand Endgame. New German
Critique, 1961. Print.
164
154
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part II — The Arts
intuition, and essentially the artists space of creation.
In this space the characters are approaching in the
Endgame words become more and more meaningless. Social
roles and political hierarchies loosen when they are shown to
be a matter of ‘play’ or performance rather than a question of
naturally ordained and inescapable identity. The loftiness to
which Hamm aspires makes these roles and the whole literary
tradition itself seem jaded and derivative in Clov’s agressive
rebuke to Hamm, ‘I use the words you taught me. If they don’t
mean anything any more, teach me others. Or let me be silent’.
As Beckett moves within this space he initiates the use of
multiple mediums into the literary-scape. Just after Endgame
he introduces the use of a tape recorder in Krapp’s Last Tape
using the radio to stretch and test the form, exploiting the
absence of a visual dimension and deploying the ethereality of
sound to create a tension between aural presence and physical
absence.” The actual substance is entirely auditory, so there
is a directly mediated link between the voice of the character
and the ear of the listener. The listener’s attention is solely
focused on the ‘soundscape’, through which the language
of the characters is necessarily foregrounded and where an
other-worldly quality pervades. The radio medium, therefore,
blurs the distinction between internal and external, between
monologue and soliloquy.”165 Sound blurs the distinction
between binaries.
Emphasizing here: if there is to be sound, there isn’t
necessarily need for visuals simultaneously, nor for sound
when visuals appear—the imagination conceives in the absence
of the other, generating the revelation within the spectator
without force, unspoiled—words as indications, or distractions.
Perhaps though, there necessitates random oscillations and
McDonald, Ronan. The Cambridge Introduction to Samuel Beckett.
Cambridge, UK: Cambridge UP, 2006. Print.
165
A Synoptic Archeology of the Poetry-Poets
155
layering between the senses to comprehend the scope of
infinity and nothingness.
Beckett’s passion for art and music is fundamental to his
execution of form, shape and symmetry in both his literary
and dramatic practice. He was an accomplished pianist and
a lover of the music of Schubert, Beethoven, Chopin and
Mozart. The intense visual features of his later drama, in many
cases strike remarkably closer to painting or sculpture than
to traditional theatre, and as such, successively inspired many
modern painters and visual artists. In his will to create, Samuel
Beckett recognized that without a melange of all the art forms
awakening and encompassing the senses, it would be near
to impossible to re-create spaces of conception, of birth and
death—spaces of creation encompass everything and nothing:
its all in what we choose to do with it, perhaps.
5.6 Into the Zone
If the modernist era sought omniscience and omnipotence in
crafting words as thought to find a solution in the chaos, the
postmodern writers, perhaps misinterpreted the invocation of
Beckett’s genius towards minimalism and blurring distinctions
of binaries into the space of creation for a fresh start, and
went the direction of embracing the chaos within that space—
the writers and artists of the era went wild in spaces of the
unknown, lost and drowning below the surface without air.
David Foster Wallace, as prime example, took to maximalism
in response: proliferation and saturation of language to
display the madness within, as with his Infinite Jest –only
to find himself lost in the chaos without escape—suicide as
sole liberation. He went beyond the edge, but couldn’t keep
156
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part II — The Arts
cohesion and went too far in-for good. The semantic confusion
that Baudelaire once began eventually shattered dualisms, but
blurred the in-between spaces as well. The Dickinsonian and
Beckettian silences turned into white noise and virtual-mediafrantic-static.
“And now, entering a new era of humanity where
postmodernity is slipping into alter-modernity, we find that
the binaries we rejected are not only blurring but finally
collapsing. Unable to say with any certainty what is real or
virtual, human or animal, organic or genetically modified,
some wish to resuscitate again, but this time with nostalgia,
the failed anti-modern project of shattering distinctions.
While the chorus – composed now of cyberpunks and
activists joined by capitalists and technocrats – rejoices in
the indistinguishable difference between online and offline,
organic and synthetic, man and machine, the most crucial
distinction of all – that between resistance and complicity
– is collapsing as well. Unless we can discover a way to
critique the system without furthering the system, we shall
be lost...It takes courage to insist that in the coming era
differences do matter – like the difference between comrade
and consumer, human and glutton or the good life and
consumption – and that without a return to the genocidal
modernist project, we can forge a new path that gathers its
strength from the difference between spiritual wealth and
material greed.”166
White, Micah M. “The Birth of Altermodern | Adbusters Culturejammer
Headquarters.” The Birth of Altermodern. Adbusters, 19 Feb. 2010. Web. 28
May 2014.
166
A Synoptic Archeology of the Poetry-Poets
157
5.6.1 Alessandro De Francesco
These minimal spaces
where gesture causes collapse
the daily emptiness,
that for an instant after-coffee
gives us a certainty we can return
to the place where something is breathing, bleeding
in the grass
—De Francesco, Alessandro. “Poetry, Age and Politics.”
Thus begins the distinction between negative and positive
de-signification that the poet/musician/artist/theoretician
Alessandro De Francesco articulates in his work, Pour une
théorie non-dualiste de la poésie (For a non-dualist theory of
Poetry). Alessandro argues that de-signification, or signifying
something by exploding it, is negative due to the lack of
sense caused by the Shoah, as crime and awareness that it
is impossible to represent. Poetry is a matter of perceiving
not representing, so that poetry has to find other expressive
paradigms than traditional figures of speech. While at the
same time it is, positive due to poetic destruction of the codes
imposed by the deconstruction of collective imagination and
broadcasting of a normalized structure, (doxa-as opinion).
Eruption of the real real and real world history involve the
observation of a reoccurring paradox in modern contemporary
poetry—ordinary language massively enters, (not ontological
but more elevated into another kind of expressive real than
ordinary language, or it wouldn’t have same cognitive impact).
That is, it couldn’t respond to aesthetic and epistemological
language if it didn’t take ordinary language into account—it
couldn’t criticize media. “In order to destroy a language you
need to take it into account. You have to put the bombs in the
158
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part II — The Arts
right places.” Ordinary language massively enters the field.
Deconstructing rules of language and trying to find other
paradigms sets De Francesco out on his path where his poetry
carries out radical criticism of ordinary language. Sometimes
with extreme devices, like concrete poetry or ascemic writing
(creating text around the unknown or unsayable). Aporia
between use and misuse of ordinary, he believes is the core
of modern contemporary poetry, or the process of designification.167
In response to this cognizance in his theory, Alessandro
De Francesco conceived the innovatory notion of “augmented
writing” (www.augmentedwriting.com). This idea, spanning
from poetry to sound and conceptual art, describes Alessandro
De Francesco’s critical use of technology and digital media
within his writing and performing practice. Pushing Beckett’s
fusing of language, visual and sound one step further with
a sort of iconoclast double of the “augmented” and “virtual”
realities, the “augmented writing” consists of sonic and visual
enhancements of the text through sound treatment and
graphic design software.
To talk is not to see. To talk frees thought from this optical
need subjecting since millennia the traditional western
approach to things and driving our thought to rely on light
or to feel threatened by the absence of light.
— Maurice Blanchot, L’entretien infini
“Augmented Writing is a writing method, a concept and a
language art project.
Each Augmented Writing object contains multilingual
digital text and hand-written material. The text comes
De Francesco, Alessandro. “For a Theory of Non-Dualist Poetry.” European
Graduate School Seminar. Switzerland, Saas-Fée. 12 Aug. 2013. Lecture.
167
A Synoptic Archeology of the Poetry-Poets
159
from web news, virtual reality environments, social
networks, but also poems, transcriptions of speeches and
dialogues with people, etc.
Augmented Writing builds up emotionally dense, multilayered narratives through a verbal material that is
processed under a radically iconoclastic political and
cognitive perspective.
The augmented writing is a sort of new literary genre,
halfway between poetry, conceptual art and storytelling.
Through its complex verbal structures, Augmented Writing
changes the paradigm of narration and asks the readerobserver to develop specific reading techniques.
Augmented Writing can be printed out in several formats:
book, folder, box, PVC panels, silk-screen sheets, plexiglas
panels, walls, ceilings and other surfaces.
Augmented Writing can also be exhibited within the
framework of reading environments, i.e. immersive spaces
with multi-channel digital voice processing.”168
In his newfound literary genre Alessandro de Francesco
succeeds in engineering his words around the white-blanksilence and in-between spaces which Dickinson acknowledged
and Beckett sought:
White for me is semantically dense, it is a part of the text,
a sort of ‘noise’ on which the poem is said. The quantity of
white, in my texts, determines the length of the rests between
words. I try to pay a lot of attention to this aspect while I
read. In my reading environments white is often represented
De Francesco, Alessandro. “Augmented Writing.” Augmented Writing.
www.augmentedwriting.com N.p., n.d. Web. 29 Apr. 2014.
168
160
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part II — The Arts
by low-frequency sound pads coming from my spoken voice
made incomprehensible.169
In other words, by lowering the frequency, we
eliminate the frantic static and slow down the pace
and rhythm so as to experience the poetic. That is to
say, it is not so very different from physics conceptual
Zero-point energy—also called quantum vacuum zeropoint energy, discussed in the earlier chapter on Zero,
reminding us that the lowest possible energy that a
quantum mechanical physical system may have; (humans
included), is the energy of its ground state. To reiterate,
all quantum mechanical systems undergo fluctuations
even in their ground state and have an associated zeropoint energy, a consequence of their wave-like nature.
The uncertainty principle requires every physical system
to have a zero-point energy greater than the minimum
of its classical potential well. This results in motion even
at absolute zero. Perhaps by lowering the frequency of
the sound and visuals within the white spaces and inbetween words, we can draw the spectator into their own
zero spaces with the observed creation.
Through the technique he calls rarefaction: by erasing
prose and creating white in order to create an alternative
narration, (enigma of the real) –by erasing words like man
has been psychologically and physically erased by trauma
and historical events, in a sort of destruction of the voluntary
memory, he redefines the relationship between language and
reality. What is engrossing is what exceeds the language—by
pushing language toward the limits in order to make this
De Francesco, Alessandro. “For a Theory of Non-Dualist Poetry.” European
Graduate School Seminar. Switzerland, Saas-Fée. 12 Aug. 2013. Lecture.
169
A Synoptic Archeology of the Poetry-Poets
161
experience of the Real in a closer way. The two advents of space
and time are together in his augmented texts, questioning
intermittence—cutting a line or creating a white space creates
a rhythm—a spatial and temporal dialectic with intermittence
and continuity, impulse and pulsation—positioning language
toward the world.
De Francesco’s work approaches the erasure of subjectivity
in the fourth person singular : singular/plural. This explosion
of subjectivity effects the poetry by creating a field of tension
towards a new state/knowledge of subjectivity, that is an
expanding and vulnerable self-fragilized be(Ing)coming—in a
multiple state of forming and reforming.
In Alessandro de Francesco’s theory170, when poetry starts
to be conscious of the multiplicity of the subject-there are three
effects in the text as direct consequence:
1.
2.
3.
Anti-psychologism: the psychic mental space
is effected by the multiplication of the identitymetaphysical is reduced in the text, creating an Echo.
Multiple identities of the subject that derive from this
open of the subject-Editing: the montage of unique
identity in propaganda and media. Editing of the
Identity of the Subject (dating websites / FB) beyond
the fictional identity.
Closeness: subject / object / real —when subjectivity
is multiplied in language and perception, the Real
enters subjectivity more. Going beyond media,
editing, (pulsation), is a subjectivity that is in the real.
In all dirty, layered, complex sides.
In his work De Francesco questions the legibility or
illegibility of the text seeking to find new paradigms of
170
Alessandro De Francesco, Pour une théorie non-dualiste de la poésie (19601989), PhD dissertation, University of Paris-Sorbonne, PhD advisor: Georges
Molinié, pp. 21-22 and 380-381.
162
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part II — The Arts
legibility—to understand, as Phillipe Lacoue Labarthe says,
poetry as experience—a traversing of a dangerous field, in
which language no longer dominates anything, but rather
commemorates the voiding of concepts and the collapse of
the constitutive powers of the subject. He believes there are no
ontologically illegible texts—only socially considered illegible,
it is a Doxa, an opinion, an abstract decision of society
transformed. We need to bring back poetic as experience/
awareness.
I try to conceive my books not as collections of poems but as
‘units’ where a non-linear narrative takes place into poetry
and into every poem, i.e. where several series of facts are
superposed and described. The non-linear logic, timing
and structure of a dream are a perfect example for such a
practice. Like Ignacio Matte Blanco, I think of dream as
a language with a precise logic. The logic of dreams helps
me in expressing a narrative that has a lot to do with the
world we live in, because it is as non-linear as human
relationships, history, reality, information and media.171
Ignacio Matte Blanco was a Chilean psychiatrist and
psychoanalyst born in the beginning of the 20th century,
who developed a rule-based structure for the unconscious
which allows us to make sense of the non-logical aspects of
thought. Blanco, (ironically carrying the family name “white”
in Spanish) shows us that (to the unconscious) “the part can
represent the whole” and that “past, present, and future are all
the same.” De Francesco proposes that through his concept
called redefinition, poets can engage in a multidimensional
storytelling.172
Whereas Giambattista Vico was convinced the poetic act
171
De Francesco, Alessandro. “Contemporary Poetry.” European Graduate
School Seminar. Switzerland, Saas-Fée. 12 Aug. 2013. Lecture.
172
De Francesco, Alessandro. Redéfinition. Mix. 2010. French edition.
A Synoptic Archeology of the Poetry-Poets
163
organized the irrational dreamscape into rational, coherent
form through rhetorical devices to give shape to events that
hold a society together, Alessandro De Francesco, believes it is
precisely this non-linear, not-rational form of the dreamscape
that is a logic and narrative all unto itself in its own form and
needs to be depicted literally, not rhetorically. If we consider
that Vico was born in the 17th century when media and
technology had yet to deliver such infinite potentialities in
creative space, and that it was only through the written word
that the poetic act could be transmitted, essentially, we can
begin to understand that both De Francesco and Vico are
not as different in their theories as one might suspect at first
glance. The two polar distinctions come full circle and meet in
the same place.
If one were to write the dreamscape, literally—it would
not need definition, nor metaphor. As De Francesco points out,
many modern poets are not satisfied with metaphor, “blue of
the eyes” requires subjectivity, or doxa, (opinion) hence leading
to new suspicions against metaphor. As all metaphors require
rhetorical definition, and as we know, rhetoric is a persuasive
device, persuasion requires an opinion, an appropriation of
one side or another, dualism. De Francesco gives an example
from the work of the French poet, Marcelum Pleynet of nonmetaphoric poesy: “the white wash wall is a bottom wall”, in
this it is impossible to detect a metaphorical hint inside of it.
Alessandro de Francesco proposes three obstacles in “dealing
with what can’t be said/known through a conditional attitude: a
poetic possibility about how it would be:”
1.
2.
A cognitive obstacle: the conformation of our brain
allows us to perceive and think only a part of what
could be perceived and thought.
A medio-political obstacle: there are things that we
164
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part II — The Arts
3.
are not allowed to say, to know, to think, and we don’t
even know it.
An emotional obstacle: there are memories,
experiences and feelings that lost their central-ness
and became non-verbal parts of the self. Spaces and
gaps inside my (De Francesco’s) poetry testify to these
obstacles while trying to focus on them, in order to
give alternative descriptions able to avoid them.173
in the early morning looking at the room surrounding the
notebook he is astonished how far necks can rotate how
eyes can move this since early childhood when some
needs we could not express to cry was to examine the real
head rolled back hands unable to grasp
now that thought has no truth to question seen from
darkness much of what he says actions we could perform
are celluloid in an unlit projector certain situations
have occurred somewhat unidentical to the first
description
provided there was a time we thought of ourselves
at the centre
—De Francesco, Alessandro. Redefinition (first text).
Translated by the author and Noura Wedell.
By demonstrating the literal through the use of words,
visuals, sounds and performance in the non-linear, nonnarrative dreamscape, and in the in-between blank, white and
silent spaces, we shift the paradigm realized by the conversion
between the illegible and unsayable. This frightening space
of the real is what makes us feel, allowing oneself to arrive
at the opening of the possible. Thus the unsayable becomes
173
De Francesco, Alessandro. Redéfinition. Mix. 2010. French edition, back
cover.
A Synoptic Archeology of the Poetry-Poets
165
something that is finally said, at least partially, and said by
the text thanks to the change of the poetic coordinates. In
the literalness, poetry can say what it says in saying it. Just
as Beckett advocated that his own work was undefinable, he
was ‘striving all the time to avoid definition’, by saying the
literal in the dreamscape we eliminate the aesthetic and the
epistemological, arriving in a suspension of judgement where
personal interests can no longer exist and thereby taking us
out of the barbarism of reflection and leading us back into the
barbarism of sense that Giambattista sought. Back into the
poetic, in fact, whereby society can become united through the
poiesis of the literal in a zero space. It is in this space where we
might arrive to create “the fictive as the third ground between
truth and fable that we properly see as being opposed to one
another.”174
Price, David W. History Made, History Imagined: Contemporary Literature,
Poiesis, and the past. Urbana: University of Illinois, 1999. Print.
174
6.
A Synoptic
Archeology
of Visual Poets
When the soul wants to experience something she throws
out an image in front of her and then steps into it.
— Meister Eckhart
6.1 The Early Period
Humanity discovers traces of its earliest known artistic
expression in the wall paintings made in the Chauvet-Pontd’Arc Cave in the Ardèche department of southern France
which date back to circa 32,000 years. One of the most curious
conundrums of archaeological discoveries in this and other
caves such as Lascaux, Niaux, Altamira, Font de Gaume,
Les Comba relles and the Volp caves, (Trois Frères, Tuc
d’Audoubert and Enlène) was the presence of art in the deepest
recesses of the caves—the dark zones that lie in perpetual
blackness. If followed from here that potential altered states
of consciousness in such sensory deprived locales may have
provoked creativity. A literal mental exploration in an abyss.
David Lewis-Williams, a South African archaeologist
presented an academic work in 1988 which investigated
the rock paintings of the San (or Bushmen) of southern
167
168
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part II — The Arts
Africa.175 In his research, Lewis-Williams examined written
documentation collected by philologists from the late
nineteenth century on the general religion and mythology
transcribed from San rock artists who had been incarcerated in
Breakwater Prison, Cape Town, South Africa.176 Meticulously
assembling sources, Lewis-Williams corroborates that San rock
paintings were created by shamans to portray the
supernatural realm entered by medicine men or women
(shamans) while under a trance. While
worldwide shamanistic trances can be induced by varying
methods (meditation, hallucinogenic drugs, sensory
deprivation, etc.) the San painters apparently achieved their
ritual altered state of consciousness by repetitive dancing,
singing and clapping—(a trance dance). While these visionary
images illustrate the spirits and events seen in the ‘supernatural
world’, in most all cases, the archaeologists determined, the art
was painted after the artist’s trance experience. In comparison
to this study, in other words, the artists painted after they went
into a so-called induced zero space. Pre-poiesis, followed by
poiesis.
Furthering their research, Lewis-Williams and Dowson
went on to investigate clinical studies of the neuropathological
effects of trance. As the nervous systems in humans are
all hardwired alike, it followed that the altered states of
consciousness that result in trance, regardless of how they
are induced, are predominantly similar. A compilation
of reactions specifically involving the mental images,
(or visual hallucinations) of trance led to the creation
175
Lewis-Williams, J. David., and Thomas A. Dowson. Images of Power:
Understanding Bushman Rock Art. Johannesburg: Southern Book, 1988. Print.
176
Bleek, D. F. “Beliefs And Customs Of The |Xam Bushmen.” Bantu Studies 9.1
(1935): 1-47. Web.
A Synoptic Archeology of Visual Poets
169
of a neuropsychological model of these visual patterns
appropriately labeled “entoptic (‘within the eye’) patterns”.177
In this model the archaeologists discovered three components
within the neuropsychological evidence. The first component is
that the mental imagery during a trance repeatedly progresses
through three stages. The first stage is governed by
geometrical light patterns that are generated within our
optical and neural systems. The second stage of the trance
leads to a group of visual patterns recognizable through
normal mental processes (heavily influenced by personal and
cultural expectations) where the entoptic patterns are then
interpreted as meaningful iconic or figurative images. The last
stage occurs with a full blown iconic hallucination in which
a sense of individual participation develops within the image
and the artist may imagine becoming the thing that he or she
hallucinates, (i.e. the innumerable images found within all the
cave paintings of human-animal conflations).
The second component of the model concerns the entoptic
light patterns themselves which consist of seven common
patterns ranging from circles, parallel lines, square cross-line
patterns, zigzags, curves, spirals and tree branch like squiggles.
The third component consists of seven principles of perception,
reflecting the fact that trance imagery involves more than
‘normal’ visual sight. These perception principles operate at each
of the three stages and include (1) replication (2) integration
(3) super-positioning (4) juxtaposition-ing (5) reduplication
(6) rotation and (7) fragmentation.
Next, the same archaeologists, Lewis-Williams and
Dawson, established that all of the components of their model
177
Lewis-Williams, J. D., and T. A. Dowson. “The Signs of All Times: Entoptic
Phenomena in Upper Palaeolithic Art.” Current Anthropology 29.2 (1988): 201.
Web.
170
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part II — The Arts
were illustrated in the paintings, artifacts and engravings found
in Paleolithic caves. Thus, leading to the conclusion that at least
some of humanity’s original visual art, like the San bushmen,
proceeded from shamanistic practices. One archaeologist,
David S. Whitley, describes his experience in the Lascaux
caves,
Standing in the middle of the Salon of the Bulls and
looking down-chamber, it was impossible not to feel that
I was in the midst of a large but strangely silent herd of
prehistoric animals that rushed headlong deeper into the
cave, carrying me with them into its recesses. And there
in the Axial gallery where the cave narrows to a shoulder’s
width and begins to plunge downward, David (LewisWilliams) pointed to the paintings of animals that literally
swirl up and across the cave roof in a constricting spiral, as
if they are spinning into a maelstrom. This, he suggested,
was a massive painting of the vortex of the shaman’s
trance, preserved graphically some eighteen thousand
years ago, symbolizing that passage into the cave was itself
a movement into the ‘supernatural’ (trance state). Perhaps
this was intended to help ritual initiates understand what
they would experience when they finally parted the veil
between the natural and supernatural worlds.178
We may consider the implications here for the visual
renderings of one of the oldest art forms in existence, as
bringing the viewer into a conceptual zero space of creation.
Further on in his work, Whitley goes on to describe his
experience in the Chauvet Cave:
My days in the Chauvet Cave were no different in this
regard, as I constantly felt unbalanced by the geological
versus the artistic beauties that surrounded me... A black
178
Whitley, David S. Cave Paintings and the Human Spirit: The Origin of
Creativity and Belief. Amherst, NY: Prometheus, 2009. p. 49-50 Print.
A Synoptic Archeology of Visual Poets
171
rhinoceros was carefully drawn in anatomically correct
profile, but its head wassuperimposed against a replicated
series of larger and smaller heads and horns—the kind
of fragmentation and duplication of mental imagery that
occurs during trance. A bison was painted with eight legs,
perhaps reflecting the sensation of extra appendages that
occur as a bodily hallucination. The curve of the cave
wall was used as the black line for an ibex and, in another
spot, a horse, as if the animals were really part of the rock
surfaceand the shaman had, as Jean (Clottes) and David
(Lewis-William) argued, “transformed the given into the
created.” Seemingly random painted geometric designs—
the entoptic light patterns experienced at the beginning
of trance—were scattered in and among the recognizable
animal images. And while alternative explanations could
be proposed for each of these paintings and features, no
interpretation but shamanism can account for all of them
and other features like them found at the site.179
Perhaps it is important to note in this meditation
on prehistoric art, the non-significance which the artists
themselves, (shamans), seemed to place on their visual artwork,
as understood through more current and accessible Native
American shamanistic practice. In many Native American
cultures the human artistic creations are consistently dismissed
because the paintings and engravings are simply
considered spiritual objects. By definition, they are believed
to have an origin in a ‘spiritual realm’ rather than the natural
world. While humans play a role in the creations, it is a minor
one compared to the forces generating the work. It is the
transformation of the artist in the process or the act of creating
that enfolds the most significance, or in other words, poetry as
experience180.
179
Whitley, David S. Cave Paintings and the Human Spirit: The Origin of
Creativity and Belief. Amherst, NY: Prometheus, 2009. p. 69-71 Print.
180
Lacoue-Labarthe, Philippe. Poetry as Experience. Stanford, CA: Stanford UP,
172
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part II — The Arts
Moreover, shamanistic cultures conceptualized existence
as a struggle between good and evil. Existence, and specifically
the shaman’s (artist’s) role within it, was to effectuate a balance
between dark and light, hope and despair, success and ruin—
unlike the most recent few thousand years where the objectives
were predominantly for good to overcome evil. The most
significant accomplishment one could hope for in shamanistic
practice, was to arrive at a balance and maintain equilibrium
within the chaos and destabilizing opposing forces. The only
method of doing this was for the artist to enter a trance state
and create the internal experience through internally perceived
visuals in the dark recesses of the caves. “To the degree that
Paleolithic artists sought to touch the faces of the gods, they
apparently looked into themselves to find their deities, not to
the world around them.”181
Though as well in shamanistic practice, it was established
that the shaman him/herself could choose to harness and
manifest the dominant forces of one or the other, (evil
or good), rather than attain balance, and were equally
responsible for both curing and creating illness, (white
versus black shamans). Thus, the recurring thematic since
the beginning of creative time: the poet/artist withheld the
power to create or destroy. As well, one can easily liken the
divine madness and demonic frenzy of the poetic trend of
our western literary history to the trance state our prehistoric
ancestors entered before creating their masterpiece cave
paintings on cave rock walls.
As noted earlier, visual art was not the only accessible
expression, [the San (bushmen) painters achieved their ritual
1999. Print.
181
Whitley, David S. Cave Paintings and the Human Spirit: The Origin of
Creativity and Belief. Amherst, NY: Prometheus, 2009. p. 77. Print.
A Synoptic Archeology of Visual Poets
173
altered state of consciousness by repetitive dancing, singing
and clapping , as well, musical instruments such as the bone
flute have recently been dated back 40,000 years], but more
crucially, one which essentially left a trace. And while it has
been determined that Native American shamanistic practice
dismisses the actualization’s or artworks formed in the
creative process, what is important in the broader scope is the
literal reminder leftover 32,000 years later of the experience
and importance our ancestors placed on finding balance
within the chaos of the human internal struggle. Again,
that is not to say that music, singing (words-sounds) and
performance were not included in the ceremonial process
of the creations, in fact, they as well apparently played an
important part in the collaborative effort—but simply that
within the process of creation, the visual effects were the only
literal trace that was left behind for future generations to try
to understand their origins.
As far as we comprehend to date through archeological
remnants of our prehistoric ancestors, there was no codified
written language 32,000 years ago, at least not any that
has been unearthed currently—as such, the literal in the
dreamscape was creation. There was no symbolic. There
was also, seemingly no written words. The very first artistic
creation known to man demonstrated the literal through the
use of visuals, and for all we are able to speculate, sounds and
performance as well, in the non-linear, non-narrative, and in
the in-between blank, black and silent spaces, almost uncannily
similar to the proposed paradigmatic shift at the end of the last
chapter on the poetry-poets, minus the (non)color shift from
black to white, in De Francesco’s theory. The frightening space
of the real is what makes us feel, allowing oneself to arrive at
174
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part II — The Arts
the opening of the possible, according to Alessandro de
Francesco’s theory on contemporary poetics. Could it be that
this very notion of poiesis not only existed 32,000 years ago,
but is the origin of artistic creativity? The unsayable, then,
became something that was finally demonstrated. In the
literalness, the visual poetry said what it said in visualizing it.
Just as Beckett advocated that his own work was undefinable,
he was ‘striving all the time to avoid definition’, attempting to
add sound and visuals in his own work. By demonstrating the
literal in the dreamscape, our prehistoric cavemen eliminated
our rational notions of aesthetic and epistemological, to
arrive in a suspension of judgement where personal interest
no longer existed in order that they might blur the dualism
between evil and good forces to arrive at a balance in the
barbarism of sense that Giambattista sought. Back into the
poetic, in fact, whereby their society could become united
through the poiesis of the literal in a zero space, (shamans,
in most all shamanistic traditions, were also the leaders of
the clan). It is in that space they poetically created “the fictive
as the third ground”, not, per se, between truth and fable, as
Giambattista noted, but in blurring the dual forces, or dualisms
that we properly see as being opposed to one another, to arrive
at some third state.
As discussed earlier in the literature section, man’s earliest
creation of words, cuneiform, dates back some 19,000 years
after the visual traces. With the invent of the written language,
so it seems, simultaneously arrived the invent of the symbolic
or metaphorical as represented in our two first stories, The
Story of a Shipwrecked Sailor and Gilgamesh, wherein we
discover our first two renditions of narratives, both, uncannily
metaphorical depictions of characters on a spiritual quest
A Synoptic Archeology of Visual Poets
175
journeying through the cosmos, meeting primordial gods, and
returning with a vision to find peace, or balance.
To continue on a synoptic visual path to present day, we
will now focus primarily on the shifts in visual art through the
lens of the neuropsychological model of enoptic visual patterns
in the seven principles of perception which reflect trance imagery
or what we venture to newly nominate here ‘zero space imagery’.
To recall, these perception principles operate at each of the three
stages of trance and include (1) replication (2) integration (3)
super-positioning (4) juxtaposition-ing (5) reduplication (6)
rotation and (7) fragmentation.
Note to Reader: For the remaining few chapters/
subchapters in these next sections of the visual poets,
and musical poets, due to time constraints and
limited word count in the project, what will proceed
is a very brief overview that merely scratches the
surface of depth that it could for now, but one which I
would very much like to return to for further research
in the future. For the visual section, the strategy was
to basically to pour the history of art through the
sieve of the neuropsychological model of the seven
principles of perception in trance state, or in what
might be a zero space, as this research nominates it.
Again, it is an extremely quick examination of the
passage of time through visual creations and could
easily be expanded into an entire research in and of
itself.
176
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part II — The Arts
6.2 Diegetic and Mimetic Forms
Diegesis (Greek διήγησις “narration”) predominantly utilizes
the three principles of perception: integration , superpositioning, juxtapositioning, while Mimesis (Ancient Greek
μίμησις “imitation”) primarily uses the principles of replication,
reduplication and rotation. These two principle concepts
within art have been contrasted since Plato’s and Aristotle’s
times. Mimesis (mīmēsis), from μιμεῖσθαι (mīmeisthai), “to
imitate,” from μΐμοϛ (mimos), “imitator, actor”) is a critical
and philosophical term that carries a wide range of meanings,
which include imitation, representation, mimicry, imitatio,
receptivity, non-sensuous similarity, the act of resembling,
the act of expression, and the presentation of the self. 182
Self-presentation is expressive and subjective, naturally. We
construct an image of ourselves to claim personal identity,
and present ourselves in a manner that is consistent with that
image. Diegesis is the telling of the story by a narrator. The
narrator may speak as a particular character or may be the
invisible narrator or even the all-knowing narrator who speaks
from “outside” in the form of commenting on the action or the
characters. 183
Diegesis, as well as Mimesis can be operated in the
presentation of self or selves in visual form. From the Greeks
onward for the next few millennia, visual art would be
worked and reworked through its interaction with that of the
external world, only eventually returning back to an internal
exploration as our prehistoric ancestors had done.
In ancient Greece Mimesis was an idea that governed the
creation of works of art, in particular, with correspondence to
182
183
“Mimesis.” Wikipedia. Wikimedia Foundation, 06 Aug. 2013. Web.
“Diegesis.” Wikipedia. Wikimedia Foundation, 06 July 2013. Web.
A Synoptic Archeology of Visual Poets
177
the physical world understood as a model for beauty, truth, and
the good. Plato, obsessed with finding the greatest good and
eliminating the evil, or demonic, and therefore the instruments
of poiesis that harbored such forces: the poets/artists
themselves, (rather than recognizing their intuitive capacity as
receptacles of worldly forces and as such potential instruments
in finding the balance between these forces as his prehistoric
poetic ancestors had), categorized all art in contrasted forms
of Mimesis and Diegesis and set the world spinning in another
direction. Moving away from the instinctive, intuitive nature
of art as a healing practice, visual art takes a turn in an entirely
new direction after Plato’s defined categorical distinctions.
Economics, religion, political propoganda and aesthetic pomp
and display would become the new driving force behind visual
artistic creations.
Both mimesis and diegesis in art are subjective,
representative forms of the external, physical world including
both aesthetic and epistemological implications in rational
processing of creativity. As well, both are imposed to try and
influence or persuade the viewer, reader, listener or spectator,
(normally during this period), through the views of the
patron of the artist. There can be no suspension of judgement
in either of these forms. Neither forms are literal, and both
evoke ambiguous interpretations leading to aesthetic and
hermeneutic debates. Visual art, from the ancient Greeks
to the late 20th century, seems to find itself in a cross-fire
dialect between mimesis and diegesis and aesthetic and
epistemological discourse. The only one of the seven principles
of perception, perhaps, that can potentially be objective, is
fragmentation, and it wont rear its visual sensibility until
Cubism, almost 3000 years later.
178
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part II — The Arts
Greece
Ancient Greek (c. 850 BC – 323 BC) and Hellenistic art
(323 BC – 30 BC) however, produced what many historians
consider the finest art of the ancient world. The two
predominant forms of visual renderings emerging from
these two periods were sculpture and vase paintings. Greek
sculpture was created in attempt to render the world in
realistic or rather, idealistic beauty—and is presented in the
forms of idealized versions of humans which were erected
not merely as replications (mimetic) but as supreme, flawless
beings in a becoming towards the primordial gods of their
own mythologies. Perfection of form in three dimensional
space (rotation) was depicted in their sculptures. During the
Hellenistic period while the statues are still physically perfect,
dramatic emotions are integrated (diegesis : integration) into
the expression of the eyes and face—being imperturbably
serene, angry, bitter, sorrowful or intensely afraid. Not
surprisingly, these emotive and dramatic additions to the
sculpture came after the invent of the drama, one art informing
the other.
Greek vase painting progressed from a geometric style
from 10th through 8th centuries BC, (in which people and
animals look like stick figures and a network of geometric
patterns: chains, squares, dots, squiggly lines, similar to
primitive art in the first stage of trance state), to highly
realistic Early Classical style in the early 5th century B.C. As
the drawings progress through the centuries clear narratives
(diegesis) depicting scenes from the Greek mythologies are
demonstrated. Hence, the artwork on the vases seems to
move from a natural intuitive expression to a more stylized,
rationally provoked aesthetic art form as time moves further
A Synoptic Archeology of Visual Poets
179
away from its primitive ancestors and into the world of words,
both literary and philosophical.
Rome
While the statue Augustus of Primaporta, modeled after Rome’s
first emperor Augustus Cesear, demonstrates a similar idealism
found in Greek sculptures and marks the beginning of the
use of visuals for political propaganda, the majority of Roman
art (300 BC – 476 AD), and in particular sculpture, unlike its
idealistic Greek predecessors, demonstrates a pragmatism and
unflinching realism in their mimetic form, not previously seen
in sculpture. The Roman artists revealed the wrinkles, receding
hairlines, sagging jowls, and paunches, realistically capturing
the disposition of their models. Hence, elaborating more
precisely on the integration of characterization and diegesis
within the mimetic practice.
As well, the Romans created temporality in visual
movement in what was perhaps the longest visual story ever
before told in the creativity of man: the Trajan Column (2nd
century AD), a 98-foot-high commemoration of the Emperor
Trajan’s conquest of Dacia, (modern Romania). The sculptor
recounts the marches and battles on a scroll that winds
around the column in humanity’s first film-strip-like visual
narrative (diegesis). While Romans are also noted for creations
of mosaics and wall paintings of portraits and characters
(mimetic), this form of art, in the end, was considered more
decorative and indicative of status and wealth and the control
that motivated its form.
180
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part II — The Arts
6.3 Art as Symbolic Representation
symbol
c.1434, “creed, summary, religious belief,” from L.L.
symbolum “creed, token, mark,” from Gk. symbolon
“token, watchword” (applied c.250 by Cyprian of Carthage
to the Apostles’ Creed, on the notion of the “mark” that
distinguishes Christians from pagans), lit. “that which is
thrown or cast together,” 184
A symbol, by definition, is an object that represents, stands
for, or suggests an idea, visual image, belief, action, or material
entity. Symbols take the form of words, sounds, gestures, or
visual images and are used to convey ideas and beliefs. The
Christian churches and Islamic regimes in power from the
Byzatine, Islamic and Medieval periods infused their belief,
action, and materialized entity, monopolizing the transmission
of their ideas through the use of the written word and visual
imagery to impose their power by utilizing the Romans
induced conception of visuals for propaganda, from the 5th to
15th century AD, or what is otherwise known as, the dark ages.
The majority of art produced during the next one
thousand years (Medieval period) again used six of the seven
principles of perceptions, depicted symbolically through
replications, juxtapositions, integrations, super-positioning,
rotation and reduplication, though utilizing them to emphasize
belief systems set in place by the governing bodies throughout
the Western and Middle Eastern world. The visual-poets, or
artists, in other words, were used simply as tools for a means to
an end in conveying a message and persuading the masses to
comply through massive visual imposing exposure in stained
184
“Symbol.” Dictionary.com. Web.
A Synoptic Archeology of Visual Poets
181
glassed windows, illuminated manuscripts, armors, carpets,
ceramics, icon paintings, mosaics, silver and golden reliquaries,
architectural reliefs, Islamic architecture and Romanesque and
towering Gothic cathedrals. The majority of the art during this
period is steeped in mysticism and symbolism focused on the
afterlife—and moreover, the surest way of obtaining entrance
to the good, rather than the evil, in that afterlife.
The term “symbolism” is derived from the word “symbol”
which derives from the Latin symbolum, a symbol of faith,
and symbolus, a sign of recognition, in turn from classical
Greek συμβόλον symbolon, an object cut in half constituting a
sign of recognition when the carriers were able to reassemble
the two halves. In ancient Greece, the symbolon, was a shard
of pottery which was inscribed and then broken into two
pieces which were given to the ambassadors from two allied
city states as a record of the alliance, such as we continue
this use today between married couples exchanging wedding
bands. Symbol(ism), as an influence on visual artists,
continued long beyond the forced religious propaganda after
the Medieval period through the Renaissance, Baroque,
Rococo, Neoclassicist, Romantic, Impressionist, and PostImpressionists period, though in specifically different
portrayals and usages in each period, and finally diverging and
morphing into a slow fading usage during the Expressionist
period, (significantly influenced by the Post-Impressionist
painter, Paul Gauguin).
Renaissance Period
During the Early Renaissance 15th century patronage shifted
from the church to the merchant class and wealthy patrons
of the patrician class, such as the Medici family, who began
182
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part II — The Arts
collecting and commissioning works of art. Humanism was
emerging, and religious devotion, though still an important
part of people’s lives, was being restructured to accommodate
the belief that man can be master of his own fate. Yet even
still, in a culture of limited literacy, symbolic imagery was
integral in informing the masses and still deeply engrained
in the artists work: fruit, animals and color represented the
most significant symbolism used during this period, each
withholding very specific meanings understood by the general
public, as had been engrained in the collective consciousness
for generations.
For example, white was a sign of innocence: birth, youth,
betrothal and marriage; the virgin Mary; virgin and child,
immaculate conception, etc. While black, dark brown or grey,
on the other hand was symbolic of the entombment, crosses
and crucifixes. As well, the leering monkey, playful finch,
scheming snake, clever crow, lustful grapes, faithful pears,
harmonious strawberries and virtuous peaches were created
to convey symbolically what are still to some degree today,
conscious associations in the minds of some.
Simultaneous to the Shakespearean effect on the
Renaissance literary period, the shift in focus to the individual
as observed Other, became the new standard of aesthetic beauty,
which was measured by rudimentary and uncompromising
representation of the individual qualities depicted in the
characters within the art. This may best explain all the strange
physiognomies which suddenly made their appearance in
Renaissance art, “..corse men of the people with uncouth,
overworked figures, peasants with bones of bronze and pointed
weather beaten features, half starved old beggars with sagging
flesh and tottering bodies, neglected fellows with bald heads,
A Synoptic Archeology of Visual Poets
183
stubbly beards, and long muscular arms. In place of the former
dainty pose, every line is now sinew. Their firm, energetic
attitude reflects the entire sprit of the rugged age.”185
During the High Renaissance, artists were elevated
in social standing and their art was regarded as divinely
inspired creations. The highly valued synthesis of science, art,
geometry and the natural world was infused into visual art
as multidisciplinary exploration began to take shape and the
artists began to explore their internal worlds. Still, the use of
color as symbolism was prevalent in the images created, but
the use of incandescent colors created with newly developed
oil mediums gave a unique vividness to their paintings as not
previously articulated with color. As well as symbolism, realism
was prominent in the period. Both Michelangelo and Leonardo
Da Vinci studied corpses of bodies to directly learn to sketch
the figure of the human image in their paintings, returning
back to the realism of their predecessors, the Romans and
Greeks, the artists sought to perfect the first principle of visual
perception in the neuropsychological model, replication.
Though this time rather than the three dimensional sculpture
their predecessors had all but perfected, they chose a one
dimensional wall surface, as their prehistoric ancestors had
done, henceforth shifting the foremost focus of art to painting
and perfecting the perception of rotation to an intricate study
of perspective on a one dimensional surface.
It is interesting to note that Michealangelo had a very low
opinion of art created in the medium of painting, (perhaps
viewing it as a primitive art), though he would still be
commissioned to create two of the most influential works in
fresco (with the setting of the plaster, the painting becomes an
185
Richard Muther, The History of Painting, Henry and Co., London, 1896
184
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part II — The Arts
integral part of the wall as had the paintings of the cavemen—
using the visual perception of integration), in the history of
Western art: the scenes from Genesis on the ceiling and The
Last Judgement on the alter wall of the Sistine Chapel in Rome.
Perhaps it is in Michaelangelo’s statues, however, where
the force of the artist’s intense internal struggles are captured
and liberated. In the schisms of conflict rendered within these
human statues, the gaze in the eyes seems to portray a mind
pulling in one direction, while the bodies tug in another. In
fact, just as in the prehistoric cave paintings, opposite forces
are a recurring thematic in his art: spirit and flesh, night and
day, freedom and slavery, peace and violence. The energy and
tension within these opposite charges is conceivably where one
discovers the artist’s greatest spiritual force.
After the innovative use of the human form in figurative
composition had reached near perfection in the High
Renaissance, a new movement influenced by Michelangelo
began to emerge, called Mannerism, (1530 – 1580)—perhaps
a very early precursor to experimentation in the visual
perception of fragmentation. Mannerist artists elongated
human figures, created contorted postures, and distorted
landscapes which were often laden with symbolism and
erotic or spiritual energy. Rather than an idealized version of
the real world, art during this movement became an initial
approach towards visuals of a conscious window into the
internal imagination of artists. Working in the sixth principle
of perception, reduplication, however, theirs was more of an
art imitating other art, rather than an art imitating nature or
an internal dreamscape which wouldn’t arrive until more than
two centuries into the future. What is perhaps most interesting
in Mannerism as the “last movement in the prolific
Renaissance period” is the remarkable similarity between
A Synoptic Archeology of Visual Poets
185
the last stage of the shamanistic trance state where full
blown iconic hallucination, in which a sense of individual
participation develops within the image and the artist may
imagine becoming the thing that he or she hallucinates:
the cave paintings of human-animal conflations, and here,
a sort of morphing and metamorphosis of the art itself as
visual attempts to push itself beyond its own boundaries,
perhaps as well, striving to find a balance in the tensions
between the dualist internal struggles previously displayed in
Michaelangelo’s statues. It was as if the artist was trying to push
out through the elongations, but never quite made it to the
third stage of metamorphosis.
Baroque and Rococo
In the 100 years following the Renaissance period, Baroque,
and later Rococo, (or ornamental, overindulgent Baroque),
developed during the Counter Reformation, (16th century
Catholic reform effort by the Church) and became a
propaganda weapon in the religious wars between Catholicism
and Protestantism in the 17th and 18th century. Art, and the
artists, fell on their knees once again, forced to pause in the
progression that the Renaissance period had awakened.
The Baroque artistic style was steeped in the third
principle of perception, integration, using exaggerated
motion and clear, easily interpreted detail to produce drama,
tension, exuberance, and grandeur in sculpture, painting,
and architecture in the visual arts, (saints in ecstasy or pain,
charging horses, turbulent skies) striking contrasts of light and
dark, vivid colors, earthly realism. Baroque artists depicted the
heroic acts of martyrs and saints to inspire the lower classes to
accept their own suffering and not lose faith.
The popularity and success of the Baroque style was
encouraged by the Catholic Church in response to the
186
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part II — The Arts
Protestant Reformation. The Church thereby decided that
the arts should communicate religious themes in direct and
emotional involvement. The aristocracy as well regarded the
dramatic style of Baroque architecture and art as a means
of dazzling visitors and demonstrating triumph, power and
control. Baroque palaces are built around an entrance of
courts, grand staircases and reception rooms of sequentially
increasing opulence.
Symbolic Shades of Light
Unlike Renaissance art which inspired spirited contemplation,
Baroque art reached out to the society to provoke action
in the name of religious faith. There were, however, a few
exceptions to the rule, and three particular artists who forged
ahead nonetheless, notably: the fugitive artist Michaelangelo
Merisis da Carvaggio, Rembrandt Harmenszoon van Rijn, and
Johannes Vermeer.
Carvaggio, who like his predecessor Michaelangelo,
portrayed the intense tension within the passion of the artist,
but rather than in statues, it was through his paintings which
he created gritty naturalism in his gloomy and murky lighting
technique called tenebrism. His paintings recount climactic
events while compellingly implying the circumstances that
precede and follow them. If we liken his work to the concept
of “the event” in Alain Badiou’s work186, where the place of
the event is seen as a rupture in Being through which the
subject finds realization and reconciliation with truth, or in
visual shamanistic terms, a balance between the evil and good
forces, we may once again witness a visual poet subconsciously
attempting the same, through the principle of perception:
186
Badiou, Alain, and Oliver Feltham. Being and Event. London: Continuum,
2006. Print
A Synoptic Archeology of Visual Poets
187
juxtaposition-ing –in this case, through his portrayal of shades
of light. Here the artist seems to be edging slowly away from
realistic replication, penetrating a more intensified awareness
of visual perception and capturing atmosphere in intensity of
shades.
Rembrandt Harmenszoon van Rijn, or simply Rembrandt
as he is known, was also in many ways antithetical to the
Baroque style. He was extremely prolific and innovative, and
through him emerged an important new genre in painting,
self portraiture. Rembrandt went beyond his predecessors in
visually interpreting human nature, humbly using his own
individual metamorphosis as his guide, he became a sort of
visual psychologist. Just as Shakespeare’s demonstrated the
greatest capacity to display the ever changing desires of man,
Rembrandt, born ten years before the Bard’s death, visually
embodied in his lifetime the line from Hamlet when he tells
Gertrude he will “set you up a glass / Where you may see the
inmost part of you.”
His self-portraits form a unique and intimate
autobiography, in which the artist surveyed himself without
vanity and with the utmost sincerity tracing the progress from
an uncertain young man, to a successful portrait painter, to
an intensely troubled and suffering old man, plummeting
the depths of his character in a life long introspective of
approximately 60 self-portraits.187 The gaze of the visual artist
turns inwards over one hundred years before the Romantic
painters and nearly one hundred years before Goethe will do
the same in his influential shift of the literary perspective. Like
Carvaggio, Rembrandt uses light and shadow to symbolically
suggest meaning through contrast, or juxtaposition-ing. But
187
Gombrich, E. H. The Story of Art. London: Phaidon, 1995. Print.
188
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part II — The Arts
whereas Carvaggio spotlighted dramatic ‘events’ using light
symbolically to intensify the moment, Rembrandt employed
a softer, warmer radiance to probe his own character. In his
self-portraits, he angles his face in such a way that the ridge of
his nose nearly always forms the line of demarcation between
brightly illuminated and shadowy areas. The partially eclipsed
faces focus the viewer’s attention upon the division between
a flood of light—an overwhelming clarity—and a brooding
duskiness. Once again, the opposing forces within the artist.
Johannes Vermeer captures moments as did Carvaggio,
but in the complete opposite context of a Carvaggian expressed
‘event’ reaming with intense tension. He embraces a softer use
of light as did one half of the eclipsed Rembrandt, but without
probing the characters, and rather by using the light to create
a diaphanous mist one can sense but not see — to arrive at an
almost Dickinson like quality of subtlety. As in Dickinson’s
poetry, (which would arrive 200 years later), where one can
feel the sound of the words — the impact of the sounds and
the blank spaces in-between, which seem more important than
the meaning itself, in Vermeer’s paintings one can feel the quiet
energy of the image, the impact of the almost empty space of
a room when the sun filters in through a window, shimmering
accents of light across objects in what seems a personal
experience, in the simplest, gentlest, seemingly mundane
moments when the noise of the world is momentarily silenced
and imbued with a poetic tenderness. Vermeer’s pellucid
integration of photographic-like use of light and image in his
perceptual replication, for the first time, brings the pleasure of
discrete silence into the visual.
A Synoptic Archeology of Visual Poets
189
Neoclassical Period
During the Enlightenment period when intellects sought to
reform society using reason, to challenge ideas grounded
in tradition and faith, and to advance knowledge through
the scientific method, a new science of archaeology was
simultaneously surfacing bringing forth remnants of a
buried world and with them emerged the Neoclassical style
in art, (literally “new” classics). With a concerted effort to
systematically retrieve the glories of lost civilizations, and firsthand observation of these artifacts, reproduction of antique
works came to dominate European visual art, and a return to
the idealized perceptual principle of replication was revived.
zArt once again went backwards in time with a recourse
to Greek mythology. Painters defined the style with their
emphasis on formal composition, historic subject matter
with contemporary settings and costumes, rigidity, solidity,
and monumentality in the spirit of classical revival. French
painter Jacques Louis David (1748–1825), in sympathy with
the French Revolution, in his paintings The Oath of the Horatii
and The Death of Socrates gave expression to a new cult of
civic virtues: self-sacrifice, devotion to duty, honesty, and stoic
austerity. And for a little less than one hundred years there was
little progression amongst the artists in visual expression.
6.4 On Conscious Liberation
Romantic Period
Quite simply put, during the Romantic period the visual artists
reached within and acted out when for the first time in history
they attempted to use their art as a type of sensational, dramatic
media—endeavoring to draw the sympathy and compassion of
the masses and promoting individual liberation, ending slavery,
190
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part II — The Arts
and supporting democratic and independence movements.
Francesco Goya (1746 – 1828), the Spanish Romantic
painter, came of age during the reign of Charles III (1759 –
1788) who was known as one of the so-called “Englightenment
monarchs,” who passed reforms to improve the conditions of
the common people. Succeeding him was his unenlightened
son, Charles IV whose disinterest in politics led his
domineering queen and her lover to take over, reigniting
the fires of the Spanish Inquisition’s reign of terror. Goya,
in his 80 etchings in 1799 called The Caprices (Caprichos),
courageously criticizes, among other things, the ignorance and
inabilities of the various members of the ruling class through
his visual renderings. The prints were an artistic experiment: a
medium for Goya’s condemnation of the universal follies and
foolishness in the Spanish society. Goya described the series
as depicting “the innumerable foibles and follies to be found
in any civilized society, and from the common prejudices and
deceitful practices which custom, ignorance or self-interest
have made usual”. The subversive imaginative element in his
art, as well as his bold handling of paint, provided a model for
the work of artists of later generations.
Following his lead, the French Romantic painters took
dramatic visual criticism of society to another level. Théodore
Gericault (1791 ±1824), the first of the French Romantic
painters, presented his most distinguished work painted in
1819, The Raft of the Medusa—a sensational larger than life
portrayal of the aftermath of a shipwreck. On June 17, 1816
the French ship Medusa sank off the coast of Senegal. The
captain and officers took the ship’s six lifeboats for themselves
and strapped together a raft made of masts for the crew and
passengers. The lifeboats towed the rafts for awhile, but it
A Synoptic Archeology of Visual Poets
191
slowed them up so much that they cut it loose. Though the
raft was only four miles offshore, a rescue ship didn’t reach it
for thirteen days. By that time only fifteen of the one hundred
thirty men were still alive.
Some resorted to cannibalism to survive. The event deeply
disturbed Gericault and before he began work on the final
painting, he undertook extensive research in interviewing two
of the survivors, constructing a detailed scale model of the raft,
and visiting morgues and hospitals where he could view, firsthand, the color and texture of the flesh of the dying and dead.
As the unsavory character of the ship’s captain was a royalist
of the restored Bourbon monarchy, the public response to
the visual replication of the event incited fervor as the painter
had hoped and expected, adding to the growing revolutionary
sentiments of the suffering lower classes. The work
encapsulates the injustice of the pre-Revolution aristocracy and
marks the beginning of the shift from the formal aesthetics of
the Neoclassical period into the intense personal expression of
the artist that will evolve throughout the modernist period.
Only five years after painting The Medusa, at thirty-two
years old, Gericault died in an accident, and Eugene Delacroix,
a fervent disciple of his became the new leader of the French
Romantic painters. Using his talent he assembled support for
the Greek struggle of independence against the Turkish Empire
with his painting The Massacre at Chios, originally entitled
“Scènes des massacres de Scio; familles grecques attendent la
mort ou l’esclavage, etc. “ (Scenes of massacres at Chios; Greek
families awaiting death or slavery, etc..) In this work Delacroix
used dramatic visual provocation in demonstrating the horror
of the wartime destruction when a military attack on the Island
of Chios resulted in the deaths of twenty thousand citizens,
192
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part II — The Arts
and the forced deportation into slavery of almost all the
surviving seventy thousand inhabitants. The painting depicts
crushed victims with little hope amongst the ruin and despair.
Their suffering is harshly presented to the viewer in an almost
flat plane; slumped, disordered, and unevenly distributed.
Beyond endeavoring to advance social and political
conditions, many Romantic artists engaged on inward quests
to locate and express a more elevated reality than the one
confronted daily. William Blake (1757 – 1827), in addition
to his poetry, painted images in an effort to carry the poem’s
meaning beyond itself, and vice versa. Painting and poetry for
him, were the two sides of each hand in prayer. In his complex
mythology, like that of the shamanistic cave painters, Blake
sought to reconcile the world of spirit and senses, and emotion
and reason. In an attempt to combine the two art forms, his
visuals portrayed a personal quest of the unified and universal
human being resonating once again with the work of the
shaman cave painters who sought to find a balance between
the good and evil forces at work.
The German painter Caspar David Friedrich (1774 –
1840) was known to stand in front of a blank canvas and
wait for an image to appear in his mind before painting.
Friedrich’s written commentary on aesthetics was limited
to a collection of aphorisms set down in 1830, in which he
explained the need for the artist to match natural observation
with an introspective scrutiny of his own personality. This
insight directly parallels the second state of trance in the
neuropsychological model, which leads to a group of visual
patterns recognizable through normal mental processes
(heavily influenced by personal and cultural expectations)
where the entoptic patterns are then interpreted as meaningful
iconic or figurative images. His best-known remark advises the
A Synoptic Archeology of Visual Poets
193
artist to “close your bodily eye so that you may see your picture
first with the spiritual eye. Then bring to the light of day that
which you have seen in the darkness so that it may react upon
others from the outside inwards.”188
Friedrich’s landscapes are visionary bridges between the
internal and external. There’s a dramatic tension between these
worlds. But in spite of the drama, nothing ever happens in the
paintings –there’s no physical action. In The Wanderer in the
Mists, a lone figure atop a cliff takes a tentative step toward a
windswept, snowy landscape below that somehow seems to
mirror his inner being. It’s as if he is about to walk into his
internal world, but hesitates. He’s drawn to the frigid, tameless
landscape, but the attraction isn’t powerful enough to incite
him to move into the fateful step. The wanderer, or the artist
himself, seems to confront a frontier wherein he fails to find
the courage to move into the third realm of the trance state
where he might morph into the landscape itself or as stated in
the earlier chapter “become a full blown iconic hallucination in
which a sense of individual participation develops within the
image and the artist may imagine becoming the thing that he
or she hallucinates.” As if: visual art and the artists themselves,
in the evolution of time, are still hesitating to move into the
beyond in the third realm between truth and fable.
Realist Movement
Realism as a style or movement needs to be distinguished from
“realism” as a term to define precise, detailed and accurate
representation in art of the visual appearance of scenes and
objects. Realism in this latter sense is also called naturalism,
mimesis or illusionism and can be located throughout all
Vaughan, William. German Romantic Painting. New Haven, CT: Yale UP,
1980. Print.
188
194
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part II — The Arts
the periods discussed thus far. In this sense it is in large part
a matter of technique and training, and the avoidance of
stylization. The movement itself was based on a rejection of the
Neoclassical artists who idealized forms and subjects and
Romantic artists whom they felt dramatized, sensationalized or
distorted the real, and is instead grounded in visual depiction
of the day to day life of ordinary people, places and things, or
rather, the literalness or direct replication of their externally
observed worlds.
Gustave Courbet (1819 – 1877) the most politically
charged of the Realist artists, told a newspaper after the
Revolution of 1848, “I’m not only a Socialist, but a Democrat
and a Republican...a supporter of the whole Revolution!”
When he exhibited his painting, The Stone Breakers, which
simply captured two working-class men in the country
chopping rocks with pick axes, the Parisian society in which
he lived were disgusted. As the rural way of life was being
displaced by the Industrial Revolution, both the upper and
middle class society preferred to avert their eyes from the
gritty side of everyday life. Courbet, in his visual depiction
was reminding them of the working class citizens revolution
and the recently published work by Karl Marx, Communist
Manifesto, which called for the overthrow of capitalism and
classless society.
Impressionists
In a way, perhaps, marrying the Romantic wanderer who
visually seemed to confront a barrier in morphing into the
landscape itself, with the Realists determination to keep
their eyes from straying away from what lay before them, the
Impressionists emphasized the ephemeral changing qualities of
the ordinary subject matter by including movement as crucial
A Synoptic Archeology of Visual Poets
195
element of human perception and experience. As if, moving
into their emphasis of accurate depiction of the transitory light
on the landscapes might create a bridge into the third realm,
capturing the ephemeral visual quality of life.
6.5 On Subconscious Liberation
Post Impressionist / Expressionist
In the realm of aesthetics Giambattista Vico (1688 - 1744)
was the first to argue that primitive man was closer to the
sources of poetry and artistic inspiration than “civilized” or
modern man, and all the world called him “an eccentric Italian
philosopher”. It wasn’t until Paul Gauguin, one hundred and
twenty years later, however, decided to remove himself from
the “civilized world” he grew up in and venture into the wild
islands in the south pacific where communication with the
world and the cultural mecca of art he came from, was sparse.
A place where humans still lived like primitives. Gauguin
tried to return to a primitive state through art and find the
proverbial “noble savage” or natural person. He said everything
in Europe is “artificial and conventional...In order to do
something new we must go back to the source, to humanity
in its infancy.” Eventually his quest to shed civilization and
become a noble savage took him to Tahiti and then beyond
into the scattered islands surrounding. Inspired and motivated
by the raw power and simplicity of the so-called Primitive art
of those foreign cultures, he painted, (amongst many others)
Where do we come from, What are we, Where are we going?
On a remote islands across the oceans surrounding
Polynesia, Gauguin traveled, assimilated and painted in
poverty until his death. It was his personal and almost
sacrificial experiment that would inspire Henri Matisse,
196
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part II — The Arts
Paul Klee and finally Pablo Picasso to break free of the six
visual perceptions of the neuropsychological model that had
dominated the world since the Greeks, and finally move into
the seventh perception of visual fragmentation, whereby the
arts bifurcate and transform the visual world into two parts:
ONE—the visual chaos of distracted, disintegrated, particle-d,
dysfunctional, meaninglessness (unless one truly was educated
and knew what the meaning or political provocation the artist
was making), or TWO—the visual in which the technological
media, or rather the dominating, aggrandizing corporations
could monopolize, capitalize and impose on the masses
with little effort utilizing the six perceptions of replication,
integration, superimposing, juxtaposing, rotating and
reduplication—with the invent of technological advance in
photography, video and giant re-printed poster-boards, for the
next one hundred years.
The world was confused with the visual handouts. Yet the
poetic visual artists still forged ahead in their search, leaving
most of the world behind and lost in visual guidance, where
they still remain today.
6.6 On Cutting it All to Pieces
So many painters today have forgotten poetry in their
paintings – and it’s the most important thing: poetry.
—Pablo Picasso
Pablo Picasso strutted into the third realm, cut it all up into
pieces and metamorphosed himself into the hallucination
of his multiple existence. Art historian John Golding stated,
“perhaps more than any other work by Picasso, The Dream and
Lie of Franco breaks down, as the Surrealists so passionately
A Synoptic Archeology of Visual Poets
197
longed to, distinctions between thought, writing and visual
imagery.”189 In his early works, labeled now as the Blue Period,
blindness is a recurrent theme. As though he subconsciously
understood that it was only through the internal visual eye
he might find what he was seeking, or reach the third stage
of trance that had not been met in the visual arts since the
cave paintings 32,000 years earlier. The motif that follows
in his work after is not surprisingly, a minotaur, or humanconflation, (man-bull).
The eighteen images in The Dream and Lie of Franco form
a non-narrative literal visual sequence in a dream-like scape.
The abstract, and sometimes grotesque forms of Franco change
from panel to panel, are negative in content and include
multiple juxtaposition-ing with animals:
1. Franco riding a horse waving a sword and a flag
2. Franco, with a ridiculously large penis, waving a
sword and a flag
3. Franco attacking a classical sculpture with a pick
4. Franco dressed as a courtesan with a flower and a fan
5. Franco being gored by a bull
6. Franco at prayer surrounded by barbed wire
7. Franco on top of a dead creature
8. Franco chasing a winged horse
9. Franco riding on a pig carrying a spear
10. Franco eating a dead horse
11. The aftermath of a battle with a corpse
12. The aftermath of a battle with a dead horse
13. Franco and a bull
14. Franco and the bull fighting
Additions to the second plate which were added during
studies for his next work, Guernica, represent the positive force
and include:
189
Golding, John. Visions of the Modern. Berkeley: U of California, 1994. Print.
198
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part II — The Arts
1.
2.
3.
4.
A woman crying and reaching up
A woman fleeing a burning house carrying a child
A woman cradling a child
A woman shot with an arrow and reaching up amid
devastation
Prose poetry which was included with the sketches and written
in an attempt to “break down the distinctions between thought
and visual imagery”, or in another words, move beyond
thinking into a zero space or total trance state, carries a chantlike musicality as the author/painter moves deeper inwards:
silver bells & cockle shells & guts braided in a row a pinky in
erection not a grape & not a fig. casket on shoulders crammed
with sausages & mouths rage that contorts the drawing of a
shadow that lashes teeth nailed into sand the horse ripped
open top to bottom in the sun.
cries of children cries of women cries of birds cries of flowers
cries of wood and stone cries of bricks
cries of furniture of beds of chairs of curtains of casseroles of
cats and papers cries of smells that claw themselves of smoke
that gnaws the neck of cries that boil in cauldron and the rain
of birds that floods the sea that eats into the bone and breaks
the teeth biting the cotton that the sun wipes on its plate that
bourse and bank hide in the footprint left imbedded in the
rock.
—Excerpts from Dream and Lie of Franco (1937)
At the same time Picasso was finishing The Dream and
Lie of Franco (June 1937), he began and finished work on
Guernica, (June 1937). In this next work we discover within
the painting an image of a human-conflation –as if Picasso had
reached the third realm and was now morphing into the work
itself. In the midst of the scattered explosion, war, destruction,
and combined light and hope within Guernica, is the minotaur.
A Synoptic Archeology of Visual Poets
199
Intense(d) energy incising its way to the center, his
poiesis did not correspond to a river, or any water. He was
on earth, solid ground, awl-ing his way to the center. When
he transformed into the landscape of his internal vision,
he placed his human-conflation in the midst of multiple
opposing forces, and observed. When he painted an Other
with whom he interspersed his own force, his visuals merge
with the Other. A prototype visual Poetist, he could both
observe and become one with the others in his images and
sought balance in his creations. He painted the literal in his
internal dreamscapes and broke them into pieces to dissect;
in doing so he paradigmatically shifted the visual arts in a
new direction. Along with the sensational force in the visual
fragmentations, creations in the world of poetic art began to
fragment into infinite pieces, and mimesis and diegesis were
left to technological visual media.
6.7 On Elimination
Abstract Expressionism
There are many artists in the past fifty years who have used art
as their personal toilet bowl—to release the internal excess,
sometimes dissect remains, sometimes flush, sometimes
display, even literally, though there are other kinds of
elimination as well. From Mondrian’s bold geometric forms
to Kandinsky’s use of symbols to Pollock’s “dripped paintings,”
the richly diverse movement of abstract painting re-creates
the journey undertaken by each painter in his move from
representational art to the abstract—a journey that in most
cases began with cubism but led variously to symbolism,
futurism, surrealism, theosophy, anthropology, Jungian
analysis, and beyond. For each artist, spiritual quest and
200
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part II — The Arts
artistic experimentation became inseparable. And despite their
different techniques and philosophies, these artists shared
one goal: to break a path to a new, ultimate pictorial truth.
And the image was erased and replaced by color and blank
spaces. The tension within the works became a magnetic pull
between color fields. Barnette Newman hoped viewers would
experience an, “awareness of being alive in the sensation of
complete space.” Mark Rothko wanted his boxes to fight and
be friends at the same time. Clyfford Still announced, “I never
wanted color to be color. I never wanted texture to be texture,
or images to become shapes. I wanted them all to fuse together
into a living spirit...I am not interested in illustrating my
time. A man’s “time” limits him, it does not truly liberate him.
Our age — it is one of science, of mechanism, of power and
death. I see no point in adding to its mechanism of power and
death. I see no point in adding to its mammoth arrogance the
compliment of a graphic homage.”
The abstract-expressionists, painting during the same
period as Samuel Beckett, were attempting to blur the
distinctions between not just the dualisms, but quite literally
the seven principles of perception in the enoptic model.
Everything became a blur until Pierre Soulages also known as
“the painter of black” completely shut the lights out and went
into the cave. Because of his interest in color, he believed black
was “...both a colour and a non-colour. When light is reflected on
black, it transforms and transmutes it. It opens up a mental field
all of its own”.
A Synoptic Archeology of Visual Poets
201
6.8 Back Into the Empty Space
In the 1960’s Fluxus performance artists preferred active art
that challenged traditional views of life and art. In their work
they attempted to re-create an atmosphere similar to primitive
ritual, involving audiences as much as the artist in the
transformative experience. The seven principles of perception
had finally been mastered by the art world and the only thing
left, so it seemed, was the ritual act of creating itself—and back
into the caves from 32,000 years ago.
Joseph Beuys, a German performance artist, activist,
sculptor, and teacher, believed the world was in a spiritual
crisis and art was the cure. He was convinced that all the arts
should be merged into a single ritualistic force. In 1972 he
founded the Free International University for Creativity and
Interdisciplinary Research. “Beuys believed that economics
is not only a money making principle but could be a way
of production to fulfill the demands of people all over the
world. Capital is human kind’s ability in work, not just money,
thought Beuys. Thus, economics included the creativity of
people. “Creativity equals Capital”. One of the most pressing
issues for the Free International University
for Creativity and Interdisciplinary Research was how to help
realize the capacity of each person to be a creative being;
how to formulate the concept of individual freedom as the
ability to shape social forms, through the transformation
of resources.”190 Beuys felt there was a breakdown between
scientific and spiritual thinking and attempted to close the gap
through shamanistic or ritual performances. He was convinced
there was a universal power of creativity and through a kind of
resonance one person’s creativity can awaken another.
“FIUWAC Statement.” Free International University World Art Collection,
n.d. Web.
190
202
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part II — The Arts
Joseph Beuys developed the concept “social sculpture”
to inspire consciousness and positive shaping. Social
sculpture was the interplay between spiritual, material and
social spheres, where, thanks to the principles of freedom
and equality, economics would create bonds of community,
cooperation, and creative flows of energy. “For Beuys constant
change and permanent dialogue was the source and process
for social sculpture. His belief was that such a work of
transformation had the power to release the binding patterns
of history and the potential to bring forward in society the
energies that emerge in creativity, in any realm in which it
manifests itself. Such a social sculpture requires a free flow of
information, democratic initiatives, production-sites that could
overcome barriers between structures, between knowledge
and instinct, to become a genuine practice of interdisciplinary
research where the organic and the technological, intuition and
intellect would melt and reconfigure into new social wholes in
which creativity can flourish.”
Not surprisingly, Joseph Beuys saw his role of an artist as a
teacher or shaman who could guide society in a new direction
(Sotheby’s catalog, 1992). Beuys left the Fluxus movement
in 1965 to further test the boundaries of art and rationality,
and founded the Conceptual Art movement of the late 1960’s
and early 1970’s, pointing out some of the contradictions in
how words and images communicate. Art and science began
merging into one another with conceptual installations use
of bio-technology, such as in the Critical Art Ensemble’s
Germs of Infection, (2005). Multimedia, communications and
biological artist Edoardo Kac used trans-genetic engineering
to create a glow-in-the-dark bunny (2000), and performance
artists Benoît Mangin and Marion Laval-Jeantet’s decided to
literally become the human- conflation in their piece called
“Que le cheval vive en moi” (2011) (May the horse live in me).
A Synoptic Archeology of Visual Poets
203
In Laval-Jeantet’s work, rather than replicate the humanconflation in hallucination and imagination, she literally
becomes it by transfusing horse blood into her own body.
To perform this piece successfully Marion Laval-Jeantet had
to slowly build up her tolerance to foreign animal bodies so
that she not go into anaphylactic shock when the transfusion
occurred. The duo describe the event, “as a radical experiment
whose long-term effects cannot be calculated, Que le cheval
vive en moi questions the anthropocentric attitude inherent
to our technological understanding. Instead of trying to
attain “homeostasis,” a state of physiological balance, with
this performance, the artists sought to initiate a process of
“synthetic transi-stasis,” in which the only constant is continual
transformation and adaptation. The performance represents
a continuation of the centaur myth, that human-horse hybrid
which, as “animal in human,” symbolizes the antithesis of the
rider, who as human dominates the animal.”
But not everyone was willing to surrender art and
its materials to the altar of performance, social activism
and conceptual art. In addition to the seven principles of
perceptions in the enoptic model, a new one had been born:
simulation. The art world again had split in two directions: the
social discourse and the artistic discourse.
“The current moment is defined by a complex and
contradictory mixture of cultural and geopolitical forces.
The last two decades have witnessed the rise of a powerful
neoliberal economic order dedicated to eliminating all forms
of collective or public resistance (institutional, ideological, and
organizational) to the primacy of capital.”191 “Such crisis,”
argues curator Okwui Enwezor, “force reappraisals of
conditions of production, reevaluation of the nature of the
191
Kester, Grant H., The One and the Many: Contemporary Collaborative Art in
a Global Context, Duke University Press, Durham and London, 2011.
204
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part II — The Arts
artistic work, and reconfiguration of the position of the artist
in relation to economic, social and political institutions.”192
From the worker-run factories of Tahrir Square to
Argentina, to the Occupy wall street protests that spread
around the world, from campaigns for tribal rights in Africa,
to Avaaz.org, we encounter new forms of social organization,
resistance and identity. Perhaps a time of both peril and
opportunity, as dominant political narratives used to explain
and justify social and economic inequality, the distribution of
resources and opportunities within society, and the relative
responsibility of the state to the public at large, are being
contested and destabilized. Art critic Grant H. Kester note,
“As these narratives lose their legitimacy, space is opened for
new stories and new visions of the future...It is this sense of
possibility and imminent threat, that animates the remarkable
profusion of contemporary art practices concerned with
collective action and civic engagement...Thus we might view
the recent proliferation of collaborative practices as part of
a cyclical paradigm shift within the field of art, even as the
nature of this shift involves an increasing permeability between
‘art’ and other zones of symbolic production (urbanism,
environmental activism, social work, etc).”193 Kester, is a firm
believer in the social discourse, or rather, as using the creative
force for collaborative social art projects that join communities
together in the process of the creations themselves, as the new
way forward for art. Perhaps Kester is right about the need to
create an open space “for new stories and new visions of the
future”, as well as the need for collaboration amongst the artists
to draw communities together via the project. But what about
the “art” itself? If their aren’t any visuals and the art is simply
192
Enwezor, Okwui “The Production of Social Space as Artwork,” 225
Kester, Grant H., The One and the Many: Contemporary Collaborative Art in
a Global Context, Duke University Press, Durham and London, 2011.
193
A Synoptic Archeology of Visual Poets
205
the process of joining community together, how exactly can we
call it visual art?
Art critic Claire Bishop, in her book Artificial Hells,194
discusses the tension between the social and artistic
judgements as ones that “do no easily merge; indeed they seem
to demand different criteria.” This criteria within that tension,
she points out, falls between the binary divides of equality and
quality, and participation and spectatorship:
For one sector of artists, curators and critics, (social camp) a
good project appeases super-egoic injunction to ameliorate
society; if social agencies have failed, then art is obliged to
step in. In this schema, judgements are based on a humanist
ethics, often inspired by Christianity. What counts is to offer
ameliorative solutions, however short term, rather than the
exposure of contradictory social truths. For another sector
of artists, curators and critics, (artistic camp) judgments
are based on a sensible response to the artists work, both in
and beyond its original context. In this schema, ethics are
nugatory, because art is understood continually to throw
established systems of value into question, including questions
of morality; devising new languages with which to represent
and question social contradiction is more important. The
social discourse accuses the artistic discourse of amorality
and inefficacy, because it is insufficient merely to reveal,
reduplicate, or reflect upon the world; what matters is social
change. The artistic discourse accuses the social discourse
of remaining stubbornly attached to existing categories,
and focusing on micro-political gestures at the expense of
sensuous immediacy as a potential locus of desalination.
Either social conscience dominates, or the rights of the
individual to question social conscience. Art’s relationship
to the social is either underpinned by morality or it is
underpinned by freedom.”195
194
Bishop, Claire. Artificial Hells: Participatory Art and the Politics of
Spectatorship. London: Verso, 2012. Print.
195
Bishop, Claire. Artificial Hells: Participatory Art and the Politics of
206
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part II — The Arts
It seems, perhaps both are somewhat correct in their
assessments, but as we revealed early on in the chapter on
William Blake in comparing his work to Nietzsche, can
we really go beyond good and evil as Nietzsche proposed,
without leading to an absolute? Or is the third ground rather
maintaining a balance in-between the two intense forces
through art, as Blake, our prehistoric ancestor-cave-painters,
and all the visuals artists before the postmodern period
maintained? Should the artists consider no ethical ground in
mutating animals into glow in the dark creatures and their own
bodies into animal half-breeds? Does this constitute a literal
blurring of the binary distinctions, is there value in this type of
art? Are these our new genius visual poets? Indeed, are these
artists “bringing back the poetic as experience/awareness,” as
Alessandro de Francesco proposes in his theory? Is this type of
art helping to guide society into to a more poetic sensibility in
their daily awareness of themselves and Others? The repeated
search for the third ground between truth and fable as a way
forward in Vico’s theory continues, as does the discourse
between poiesis and demiourgia discussed amongst the Greeks
over 2000 years ago.
Felix Guattari and Jacques Rancière maintain that the
tension between these two camps must
remain. Guattari’s paradigm of transversality offers one way
of thinking through these artistic operations: he leaves art as
a category in its place, but insists upon its constant flight into
and across other disciplines, (collaboration), putting both
art and the social into question, even while simultaneously
reaffirming art as a universe of value.
Jaques Rancière proposes that in art, theatre, and
education alike, there needs to be a mediating object that
Spectatorship. London: Verso, 2012. Print.
A Synoptic Archeology of Visual Poets
207
stands between the idea of the artist and the feeling and
interpretation of the spectator: “The spectacle is a third term,
to which the other two can refer, but which prevents any
kind of ‘equal’ or ‘undistorted’ transmission. It is a mediation
between them, and that mediation of a third term is crucial in
the process of intellectual emancipation...The same thing that
links them must also separate them.”196
Claire Bishop argues, that at a certain point, “art has
to hand over to other institutions if social change is to be
achieved: it is not enough to keep producing activist art...Since
the 1990’s, participatory art has often asserted a connection
between user generated content and democracy, but the
frequent predictability of its results seem to be the consequence
of lacking both a social and an artistic target..participatory art
today stands without a relation to an existing political project
(only to a loosely defined anti-capitalism) and presents itself as
oppositional to visual art by trying to side-step the question of
visuality.”197 She has a point: if there are no visuals, how exactly
can we call it visual art? She proposes, as well as Guattari and
Rancière, mediating a third term—an object, image, story,
film, even a spectacle—that permits this experience to have a
purchase on the public imagery.
But if story, or sound are that mediated third term, than
wouldn’t it follow that the poetry-poets and sound poets who
create in those Other arts, be involved in collaboration with
the visual poets to reach that distance in-between and thereby
achieve a sense of community amongst themselves and in
bringing forth the spectators that gather to experience the new
poetic art?
196
Rancière, Jacques, and Gregory Elliott. The Emancipated Spectator. London:
Verso, 2009. Print.
197
Bishop, Claire. Artificial Hells: Participatory Art and the Politics of
Spectatorship. London: Verso, 2012. Print.
7.
A Synoptic
Archeology of
Sound Poets
The composer who writes a major work, literally reflecting
the whole world, is himself only an instrument being played
by the whole universe.
—Gustav Mahler, 3rd Symphony
Starting out from inert matter –rocks and inanimate Nature
–he (Mahler) could already glimpse how the vast epic
would proceed, one by one, through the stages of evolution:
to flowers, animals and mankind itself, before ascending
to universal love, which he imagined as a supremely
transcendental force.
—Henry-Louis de la Grange
7.1 The Early Period198
Echoes
MUSICOLOGIST IÉGOR REZNIKOFF, moved slowly
and steadily in total darkness into the cave Arcy-sur-Cure
198
Hendy, David, Noise: A Human History of Sound and Listening, Profile
Books, London, 2013. Most of the facts and figures found for the Early Period
section of the Synoptic Archaeology of Sound Poets, was taken from David
Handy’s extensive research on the topic.
209
210
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part II — The Arts
in Burgundy. Using his voice as a sonar, he sent out a pulse
of sound, then listened for any unique response. When the
resonance throughout alternated, he lit his torch. At each
precise point of mutating sound, he saw on the wall or ceiling
a small dot of red ochre, a painted pattern of lines, a negative
handprint, sometimes even an animal was visualized. At one
place in Arcy-sur-Cure, in the bottom of the main hall where
each sound provokes up to seven echos, there are paintings of
several mammoths, some bears, a rhinoceros, a salmon, some
sort of cat, and an ibex. In the mezzanine area near the so-called
Salle des Vagues (Hall of Waves), just where the resonance is
most striking there is a ceiling densely packed with animals of all
kinds and on the floor, the delicate outline of a bird.
In the darkest recesses of the caves, when one speaks, or
sings or hums or whispers, a cacophony
of echos is created, each one lasting long enough to merge
with the next and creating a sort of en-trancing wall of sound.
In the spaces where trance states took place, as established in
the chapter on visual art, it is easily conceivable that 32,000
years ago our prehistoric ancestors believed that the cave was
responding back to them with precisely the same sound, or
rather as if the cave itself were alive. The notion that animal
spirits can be brought to life from sound would have made sense
back in a world with no scientific understanding of sound waves
and reverberation. In a prehistoric cave a clap bounces back in
a series of overlapping echoes as if the animals painted on the
walls start galloping. In the illusionistic feeling of this surroundsound-like cinema, the spellbinding and beguiling effect of
sound, perhaps, inspired the visual artist, or rather, enabled
them to enter into their trance states, (or zero space), and create
visuals. The one art spurring the next.
A Synoptic Archeology of Sound Poets
211
Reznikoff is the first person to make the connection
between the visual art and the resonant feature of the cave
in which eighty percent of the cave paintings are located
specifically where the acoustics are particularly unusual. The
musicologist discovered that at other caves the same pattern
recurred: in Niaux cave in the Pyrenees all the animal paintings
are in the Salon Noir, which Reznikoff describes as sounding
like “a richly resonant Romanesque chapel”; at Le Portel, a whole
series of red dots are strung along a ten meter tunnel precisely
where, Reznikoff reports “a living sound point lies”.
Reznikoff went on in his research to discover that in
prehistoric art found outside of caves, often the paintings
are pinpointed in locations that are exceptionally difficult to
access. Once again, his experimental recordings revealed that
rock paintings of people and animals are in exactly the same
places where echoes are strongest, or more, where sound
travels furthest. The revealing connection between sound and
image in acoustically interesting spaces has led researchers
to conclude that perhaps it was the mesmerizing power
of traveling sound, or echoes, that first first provoked our
ancestors to create.
In caves at Roucador, Cougnac and Pech-Merle in
France, at Nerja in Spain, and at Escoural in Portugal,
rock pillars are laden with red dots bearing marks of being
repeatedly hit. When struck, the walls give off differently
pitched sounds. These particular caves have left behind some
of the worlds oldest surviving musical instruments, bone
pipes or flutes. Some of the very oldest bone flutes discovered
at Isturitz in the Pyrenees were found next to a decorated
pillar, in the one chamber that amplified sound more than
any other part of the cave.
With the flickering half light of their lamps, the
atmosphere would have been ideal for rituals or celebrations
212
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part II — The Arts
for music, singing and summoning of the shamans trance
state. In the midst of all the sounds and noise, our prehistoric
ancestors made music. Over time through continuous feedforward loop, new sounds, tonal effects, notes and rhythms
were discovered. They were tried out, they echoed back, they
were copied, altered, replayed, thousands of times, over and
over again—eventually, from the chaos of the noise, emerged
order within the sounds, and with it, rhythm and musical
performance.
Naturally, chanting and playing music wasn’t only about
communicating with a spirit world
—oftentimes, it was about communication between living
people in this world –about men and women and children
doing something together in time, about bonding, sharing,
quite simply, about collaboration and community.
Rhythm
In Ghana and throughout West Africa—in the dark rain
forest where light is sparse, communication has been made
for thousands of years through the sound of drums—using
mixtures of high and low tones to send messages like a
telegraph into the air from village to village. For thousands of
years no one in the world could communicate as far and as
fast as the Africans with their talking drums. Sound was more
than just music, it was a form of tele-like-communication.
The rhythm of the drums provided a means for our ancestors
to reach each other even at a great distance. These musical
qualities offer us a strong insight about the past – perhaps even
several million years ago before we had language or music
we might find that the very first protohumans to leave Africa
had something else instead—a kind of singsong utterance that
was a curious mix between language and music. Sharing the
A Synoptic Archeology of Sound Poets
213
energy, rhythm and song of the Other was our first form of
communication and collaboration.
Information in communicative sounds demonstrate
mutual trust amongst a group. When different rhythms start to
interact and synchronize with each other, bodily rhythms are
assimilated into a collective rhythm. With every participant
constantly re-calibrating to keep in unison, it is impossible to
tell the difference between the performer and listener because
the distinction doesn’t really exist. The rhythms across the
continents are universal: the beats of a heart, in and out of
breathing, steady gait of walking, biorhythms that continue
to shape the undulating patterns of music and language—of
human expression, communication and creation.
Those most skilled in conveying their own feelings
and in reading the feelings of others, or in other words, the
musical Poetist, would have been the most useful members of a
community engaged in synchronizing rhythms and sounds—
predicting and manipulating the behavior of others gives one
a big evolutionary advantage. Something with the quality
of music might well have been a safer evolutionary bet than
using words. Words have always been closest to specificity in
meaning. Those listening to words, might agree, equally, they
might disagree, and so quickly fall out. Music is different, its
meaning is helpfully vague – if an argument is brewing its
often better not to say anything199 and just lose ones differences
in singing or dancing—these musical sounds would also have
been a potent symbol of the groups togetherness in the face of
any external enemies.
Rhythm endures and is profoundly rooted as a universal
feature of human made sound. We recognize repeated
similarities in music from different parts of the world
Schirmacher, Wolfgang, “PARALLEL ETHICS” European Graduate School,
Saas-Fée. Aug. 2011. Lecture. “No action is the best action”.
199
214
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part II — The Arts
with the same underlying melodies at work in completely
different languages. Over the past million years or so we
spread further across the world and as our cultures inevitably
drifted apart, we adapted to the varying habitats in which we
lived—the natural soundscape embedded in our immediate
environments, influenced the aggrandizing variables in sound
and in the humans who were inspired to mimic or recreate
them, (mimesis).
Nature can be very noisy. The world has often been
described as macrocosmic musical instrument. The creatures
in both the wild and the human cities create their own animal
orchestra, singing with an exceptional range of voices from
hour to hour, season to season and place to place. In fact, each
square mile of the world has its own acoustic signature, and it
is the poetic sound artists themselves who have the capacity
to become the musical genius loci of place in capturing the
essence of the the musical rhythm and sounds in any-placewhatsoever.
But what about silence?
Silence
Just off the north coast of Scotland, lies an archipelago of
around 70 islands where five thousand years ago on the smaller
islands of Orkney we discover the remains of an ancient
Neolithic civilization, and within it, the first known man made
creation where silence resides—a zero space. Close by the
prehistoric village of Skara Brae are are two stone megalith
circles, The Stones of Stenness and the Ring of Brodgar, and
further in the distance, The Maeshowe Chambered Cairn—a
massive chambered tomb where at sunset during the three
weeks before and after the winter solstice the setting sun sends
A Synoptic Archeology of Sound Poets
215
a beam of light along a tiny passageway to illuminate its central
chamber.
It is here we can appreciate a fundamental shift in human
history. Neolithic ancestors from this period are no longer
making do with caves, canyons or forests for there spiritual
activities or for shelter. They began creating their own
architectural structures. Archeologists have determined that
these megaliths were the center of the society’s ritual life, and
in addition, had their own human made acoustic identity.
While researchers aren’t certain the monuments were
built specifically in order to create sound effects – they are
certain no one was living in them, and that they were more
likely where some type of rituals or social event took place.
Ethnographers have discovered that in most cultures rituals are
multi-sensual affairs. And when you enter these neolithic sites,
it’s as though one is entering a theatre stage. If the people who
built them noticed specific sound effects within the circle, they
must have been tempted to benefit from them.
In the Ring of Brodgar—there is a perfectly formed circle
about one-hundred meters across with twenty-seven standing
stones around, approximately twelve feet tall, all surrounded by
a big circular ditch cut out of solid rock. Originally, researchers
suspect there were maybe 60 or so standing stones, enough to
create an enclosed effect. In the center—echoes can be detected
around the inside of the circle. Clapping or shouting intensifies
the effects, as do drums. Echoes come back around from all
around the inside of the circle. When one moves away from
the center, the effects lessens and once outside the circle, the
echo effect is lost completely. Speculation is that the theatrical
shift in sound as you entered the circle was intentional. As the
megalith is located just near to the sea, the standing stones
seem to close out the natural outside sound of wind and waves
216
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part II — The Arts
to contain more ambient, ceremonial sounds within the circle.
The chambered tomb nearby called Maeshowe, is made
of dry stone walling, with mounds of clay and grass growing
around—in other words, an ideal sound proofing space. In
this space, high frequency sounds are trapped inside and
low frequency sounds escape. If one was to drum inside,
someone standing outside could hear something deeper –
but this distorted rumble would probably be second rate as
an experience compared to what might be heard inside the
chambers hidden center.
To enter the tomb, one must first traverse a passageway—
which consists of a long tunnel in which intense stillness takes
over as sounds from outside begin to disappear. Once one
arrives in the center, the sound of the outside world entirely
vanishes. This is the first known handcrafted space of silence in
human history. In this artificial blank canvas of silence, one has
the capacity to create completely new soundscapes, or what’s
known in musical language as a standing wave of sound—
where sounds falls back upon itself and builds up in complex
layers.
“When beating a single drum in this space—researchers
noticed that the tonal frequency is a lot like the one that can
send the human brain into a state about halfway between
wakefulness and sleep±a state that prompts our strongest
moments of vivid mental imagery, even hallucinations.
Something else being generated that we cant actually notice
which is called ultra low frequency infrasound –something
that can make us feel, peculiar.”200 In other words, our ancestors
created a physical platform for entering a soundscape zero space.
A few years ago in a burial chamber nearby, volunteers
were exposed to short bursts of infrasound created by
Hendy, David, Noise: A Human History of Sound and Listening, Profile
Books, London, 2013.
200
A Synoptic Archeology of Sound Poets
217
drumming. What they reported was dizziness and in some
cases a strange feeling of rising physically. Researchers are
uncertain whether this was intentional in the original builders
designs –but they suspect that those in charge of the rituals
would have delighted in these other-worldly qualities.
Stories from the same area refer to a ritual practice of
incubation, which has lead researchers to believe that the tomb
of Maeshowe may have been used as a place of silence, where
members of the society came to be alone on a sort of spiritual
retreat or quest. Similar sanctuaries are discovered across
continental Europe where remains of ancient sanctuaries from
classical times were used as places where the ill who were
seeking a quiet refuge in order to hibernate and perhaps be
renewed, would come to rest. These places are quite similar
to the sanatoriums scattered across the imposing, sublime
landscapes of the Alps in Europe, in which a laundry list of
renowned poets, writers, composers and artists came to ‘heal’
throughout the 19th and early 20th century.
Philological findings in many European languages offer
evidence through the usages of the word itself, cave: coming
from a common root meaning: to hide. Later in Latin it
becomes: cell; in Old Irish: hiding place, and silence; in Old
Welsh: dream. Various meanings weave together to hint at
a place sealed off from the outside world. A place of peace
and recovery—evoking the primordial functions of the earth
mother as both tomb and womb—where creation, gestation
and birth take place.
Researchers believe it is highly likely whoever were the
gatekeepers of the silent tomb of Maeshowe had a great deal of
power—as those that were allowed to access the tomb would
have selected and reinforced social hierarchies. They believe
that perhaps these gatekeepers were more like priests, or what
218
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part II — The Arts
had thirty thousand years before them, been the shamans. The
Poetists, or the gatekeepers of silence, the balancers or the good
and evil forces through the removal of all noise, the ones who
could both express themselves and feel the Others, observe and
engage, or back then—the professional gatekeepers of the spirit
world, were perhaps people learning to manipulate sound
in all kinds of unique ways in their zero space sanctuaries—
unknowingly to shape what would eventually be inherited
by the imposing architecture in the cathedrals of the Romans
and throughout the Middle Ages, when Gregorian chants
echoed through the grandiose and awe-striking infrastructure,
and the Christian disciples composing them would lead us
into another realm of music and sound where participants
would no longer be re-calibrating to keep in unison. It would
henceforth become distinctly possible to tell the difference
between the performer and listener, because the distinction
really did come to exist.
Sound as a Controlling Spectacle
An account from Russian exiled to Siberia by the Czar—
participating in a seance in a carefully closed room, noticed
how skillfully the shaman could deploy sound to create
a ritually suggestive atmosphere, especially at night. The
Russian described it as if the room became alive with spirits
flying through the air. The effects this shaman admit-tingly
achieves with the help of some basic acoustical principles and
by creating a suggestive atmosphere in that tiny, overheated
space, are noteworthy. Sound as means to create the illusion
of reaching a spiritual world, has been a remarkably pervasive
feature of human culture for thousands of years.
An example of acoustic trickery which bears and
uncanny similarity to the shamans practice of throwing
A Synoptic Archeology of Sound Poets
219
voices can be witnessed today in an 800 year old medieval
cathedral in an English city, where once a year, on Palm
Sunday, they continue to perform the spectacle for the
spectator through the carefully constructed architecture
created for the specific purpose of acoustic trickery. The
congregation are assembled as a procession of the choir and
clergy march into the entrance singing. The next lines come
from a disembodied voice floating down from the facade
above –up atop the giant cathedral are three hidden holes
in which clergymen hiding behind them sing into the holes
to create a projected echo-like sound positioned from the
height of the angels to create the illusion of an angel in full
voice singing from above. “The charm of this performance,
is not blinding to the politics behind it—setting out to create
a spectacular performance of the churches power to make
things happen not through the power of suggestion, but
as though the experience itself had actually taken place, the
illusion in the 13th century, as if the angels were singing to the
masses below.” Thus, it was through the application of their
stories (words), visual art and perhaps most impressively,
sound (music), that the Churches were able to manipulate
power and control and impose their belief system, for one
thousand years during the Medieval Period.
7.1 The Art of Melody and Harmony
In the 13th century, arcane music and gregorian chants of the
celestial spheres was being questioned. Playing music and
whispering comforting words to lift spirits was now being used
in a compassionate way—not as a supernatural force, but in the
flesh and blood realm of living people.
The musician rather than physician was newly deemed as
having the capacity to offer the best relief—having a musician
play at bedside was seen as the best response to any sickness
220
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part II — The Arts
With the change in design from the Romanesque churches
to the Gothic architecture—while the visuals were more
spectacular, sonically the resonant within the space changed,
and with it the music. For the first time polyphony was
introduced: with more than one note being sung and played at
a time, this infinitely adaptable style created just the right mix
of overlapping tones and prolonged notes instead of acoustic
chaos of echoes—thus this soaring celestial harmony was
created matching the buildings soaring architecture.
During the Renaissance period, along with the literary
and visual arts, music, for the first time became selfsufficient, existing for its own benefit. Many familiar modern
instruments, including the violin, the guitar, and keyboard
instruments, were born. Increasingly freed from medieval
constraints, range, rhythm, harmony, form, and notation,
became a vehicle for personal expression. Composers
found ways to make music as expressive as the texts they
worked with. Secular music assimilated techniques from sacred
music, and vice versa. Courts hired virtuoso performers, both
singers and instrumentalists. During the 15th century the
sound of full triads became common, and towards the end of
the 16th century the system of church modes began to break
down entirely, giving way to the functional tonality which was
to dominate western art music for the next three centuries.
7.2 The Art of Discord
In the Occident, leading up to and through the Enlightenment
period, the people listened to pomp and ceremony in the
courts display and soon realized that the churches no longer
had a monopoly on the music in the use of spectacle. The new
secular rulers, however, had something to be concerned with
as the peasants began making a great deal of noise outside
A Synoptic Archeology of Sound Poets
221
while using their “musical” celebrations to upend the whole
social order.
The School of Theology at the Sorbonne in Paris admitted
in 1444 that there was a real social need for foolishness
amongst the plebeians—they announced that the “wine barrels
burst if from time to time we do not open them and let in
some air.” It was decided that the normal burdens of hard labor
and poor diet could be forgotten when carnival provided food,
drink and sociable frivolity. Thus, the carnival was created.
While in the other forms of creation, at this point in
history, the lower classes made little use of creating visual art
during their spare time, and perhaps some, if they were literate,
read ballads and theatre—music, on the other hand, was
always prominent. It had no socio-economic boundaries—it
was the one creative outlet that could immediately change
an atmosphere, lift spirits and provoke sentiments closer to
sublime blissfulness, no matter what the quality. As cheap
instruments could be easily obtained, (including pots and
pans), it was easy to make sound in the streets.
Eventually, however, carnival became a cover for rebellion.
The uncontrolled noise spoke not just of pleasure and
abandonment but also of underlying discontent, anxiety over
plague and price rises for bread, or just crushing poverty. The
people were only able to express their discontent in the coded
words of songs in festivals—oaths, toasts, riddles, ballads, airs
whistled in the streets.
While there is no universal model for what carnival should
be, what these organized precessions share is the participants
desire to step aside from the normal routine of work and let
themselves go for a moment, so its no surprise that the poorest
were the most enthusiastic, and the carnival was often a cue for
the rich to leave the city for the quiet country side. Carnivals
222
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part II — The Arts
were vulgar popular culture teetering on the edge of violence
–mostly paranoia but in one respect the rich had the right to
be weary. The carnival had been the dispossessed way of saying
“I’m here, I exist, I wont be ignored” which is why perhaps,
in 16th and 17th centuries, so many of the great and good—
would reclaim more loudly then ever the virtues of emotional
restraint and sealed lips.201
The sounds of the carnival, however, or the “carnival in
classical music” would go on to inspire musicians throughout
the ages ranging from Mozart to Khatchaturian: Schumann,
Satie, Svendsen, Prokofiev, Richard Strauss, Johann Strauss
II, Mendelssohn, Saint-Saëns, Debussy, Berlioz, Verdi,
Leoncavallo, Raymond, Liszt, Nielsen, Gustav Mahler and
Leonard Bernstein.
7.3 The Art of Dissonance
Despite the fact that words like unpleasant and grating are
often used to explain the sound of dissonance, all music with
a harmonic or tonal basis—even music perceived as generally
harmonious—incorporates some degree of dissonance. The
buildup and release of tension (dissonance and resolution),
which can occur on every level from the subtle to the crass,
is partially responsible for what listeners perceive as beauty,
emotion, and expressiveness in music.202
In the 18th century different sound worlds were forming
between those with power, and those without. As it would
have been impossible to punish every breach of the law,
201
Hendy, David, Noise: A Human History of Sound and Listening, Profile
Books, London, 2013.
202
“Consonance and Dissonance.” Wikipedia. Wikimedia Foundation, 07 Jan.
2014. Web.
A Synoptic Archeology of Sound Poets
223
there remained a deeply religious morality about sound
and visuals. Hearing or seeing something inappropriate was
still not allowed –as if visuals and sound could corrupt the
soul. And yet, certain forms of music could still be a form
of experiencing the divine. When listening to music it was
culturally taboo to not withhold self restraint and keep silent
while listening to a performance. A social hierarchy grew
between the elite, the cult culture of upper and middle class,
and the unrestrained poor, dependent on how they listened—
which can still be witnessed and experienced in symphony
halls and opera houses to this day. Music and sound was
divided between opera and balls versus fairs and revels, and
those who listened to either were scarce to regard each other of
the same species.203
As the stoic and closed Enlightenment period came to an
end and the age of Romanticism emerged, the new power of
sound found in the roar of the industrial revolution and new
machines grinding through the daily life, planted the seeds of a
darker and more authoritarian attitude toward music amongst
the composers. Before, the musical concerts in restaurants
and stately homes were more of a background noise amongst
the gossiping at parties and social events—no one was really
listening. The German composer Richard Wagner declared
“our art is religion” and set out to change the way people
received the musical performance; to create, rather, poetic
performance for everyone across all socio-economic levels. In
the complexity of infusing all the arts into one performance, he
hoped to arrive at conducting a more universal audience.
With the birth of Wagner, public collaborative creativity
was created. Karl Friedrcih Trahndorff (1782-1863) a
German philosopher and theologian who “belonged to the
203
Hendy, David, Noise: A Human History of Sound and Listening, Profile
Books, London, 2013.
224
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part II — The Arts
supernaturalist camp, opposed to theological rationalism and
emphasized the in-deducible, supernatural and mystical nature
of religious revelation, by implication minimizing the ability of
human reason to grasp the content of faith.”204 In other words,
Trahndorff believed, a zero space could not be recognized by the
reason of his “englightened forefathers”, and as such, in an essay
in 1827 introduced for the first time the term Gesamtkunstwerk,
(a german word translated as 1) total work of art, 2) ideal
work of art, 3) universal artwork, 4) synthesis of the arts, 5)
comprehensive artwork, 6) all-embracing art form or 7) total
artwork), meaning a work of art that makes use of all or many
art forms or strives to do so for the sake of arriving at a divine
revelation or sublime space for the audience and listeners.
In 1849, the practicing German opera composer,
theatre director, polemicist and conductor, Wagner used
the term in an essay entitled “The Artwork of the Future”,
where he described his revolutionized vision of opera as a
Gesamtkunstwerk, in which the various arts such as music,
song, dance, poetry, visual arts and stagecraft were unified. In
his original essay, Wagner placed music as subsidiary to drama,
until in 1854 he was introduced to the philosophy of Arthur
Shopenhauer and more specifically his work, The World as
Will and Idea. One of Schopenhauer’s doctrines was that music
held a supreme role in the arts as a direct expression of the
world’s essence, namely, blind, impulsive will.205 This doctrine
contradicted Wagner’s view, expressed in “Opera and Drama”,
that the music in opera had to be subservient to the drama.
Wagner scholars have argued that Schopenhauer’s influence
caused Wagner to assign a more commanding role to music
in his later operas, including the latter half of his most famous
204
“Karl Friedrich Eusebius Trahndorff.” Wikipedia. Wikimedia Foundation,
07 Jan. 2014. Web.
205
Magee, Bryan (1988), Aspects of Wagner, Oxford: Oxford University Press.
A Synoptic Archeology of Sound Poets
225
work, Der Ring des Nibelungen (The Ring Cycle), and his last
work Parsifal, which he had yet to compose.206 Wagner took
twenty-six years from writing the first draft of a libretto in 1848
until he completed Götterdämmerung in 1874. The Ring takes
about fifteen hours to perform and is the only undertaking of
such size to be regularly presented on the world’s stages.207 In
the end, he recognized that sound came first.
Notably from Tristan und Isolde onwards, Wagner
explored the limits of the traditional tonal system, which gave
keys and chords their identity, pointing the way to atonality
in the 20th century. Some music historians date the beginning
of modern classical music to the first notes of Tristan, which
include the so-called Tristan chord. Not only would Wagner
influence an an entire century of musicians that followed in his
wake, his influence on literature, philosophy and even modern
day cinema, left a significant footprint:
“[Wagner’s] protean abundance meant that he could inspire
the use of literary motif in many a novel employing interior
monologue;... the Symbolists (visual artists and poets) saw
him as a mystic hierophant; the Decadents found many a
frisson in his work.”208
Composer Gustav Mahler extended Wagner’s
“maximalization” of “the temporal and the sonorous” in music
to the world of symphony. The critic Theodor Adorno has
noted that the Wagnerian leitmotif “leads directly to cinema
music where the sole function of the leitmotif is to announce
heroes or situations so as to allow the audience to orient
206
Dahlhaus, Carl (tr. Mary Whittal) (1979), Richard Wagner’s Music Dramas,
Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
207
Millington, Barry (ed.) (2001), The Wagner Compendium: A Guide to
Wagner’s Life and Music (revised edition), London: Thames and Hudson Ltd.
208
Ibid.
226
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part II — The Arts
itself more easily”209 Among film scores as recent as three
years ago, we can hear the sounds of Wagnerian themes in
award winning films made by contemporary directors such as
David Cronenberg, Lars von Trier and Francis Ford Coppola.
Acclaimed record producer from the 1960’s, Phil Spector’s
original “wall of sound” recording technique was heavily
influenced by Wagner. The technique typified sound by having
a number of electric and acoustic guitarists perform the same
parts in unison, adding musical arrangements for large groups
of musicians up to the size of orchestras, then recording the
sound using an echo chamber, not unlike the caves 32,000
years ago. The technique is also described as “utilizing
instruments, combining, say, pianos with guitars to form a
unique instrument. In other words, if you combine them
electronically well enough, you’re not going to have a guitar or
piano, you’re going to have piano/guitar: a new instrument…
in the ‘40s and ‘50s, arrangements were considered: “OK here,
listen to that French horn”—or—”listen to this string section
now.” It was all a definite sound. There weren’t combinations
of sound, and with the advent of Phil Spector, we find sound
combinations, which—scientifically speaking—is a brilliant
aspect of sound production.”210 Finally, Friedrich Nietzsche in
his Birth of Tradgedy, originally considered Wagner’s music
as the Dyonisian “rebirth” of European culture in opposition
to Apollonian rationalist “decadence”. In the end, Richard
Wagner inspired all the arts, still even today, with his birth of
collaborative creativity.
Adorno, Theodor (tr. Rodney Livingstone) (2009), In Search of Wagner,
London: Verso Books.
210
Harris, Bob. “Rare Brian Wilson interview 1976” YouTube.
209
A Synoptic Archeology of Sound Poets
227
7.4 The Art of Noise
At first the art of music sought purity, limpidity
and sweetness of sound. Then different sounds were
amalgamated, care being taken, however, to caress the
ear with gentle harmonies. Today music, as it becomes
continually more complicated, strives to amalgamate the
most dissonant, strange and harsh sounds. In this way we
come ever closer to noise-sound.211
In 1857, Édouard-Leon Scott de Martinville invented the
phonautograph, the first device that could record sound waves
as they passed through the air, though it was intended only for
visual study of the recording and could not actually play back
sound. Perfected by Thomas Edison, the phonograph expanded
on the principles of the phonautograph in 1878, but it wasn’t
until the advent of electrical recording in 1925, which did not
become common until the late 1930’s, when recorded sound
became a permanent fixture in the masses homes. “Listening to
radio, at first, was far more uncanny than gramophone—it was
as if disembodied voices came out of thin air, or somewhere
perhaps thousands of miles away, across oceans at the speed
of light, but by 1930’s the magic ebbed away, and the radio
became a normal part of life.”212
Recorded sound enabled captured sounds to become
freed, portable, and permanent. It was the decline of classical
music. Just as art had bifurcated into mass visual productions
and the intellectual artistic elite creations, music followed
suit. The majority of people stopped listening, and only began
hearing, background music and noise.
Russolo, Luigi from The Art of Noises, March 1913.
Hendy, David, Noise: A Human History of Sound and Listening, Profile
Books, London, 2013.
211
212
228
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part II — The Arts
But for the artists, the ability to manipulate music through
recording, could release harmonic order. The Futurists in
1909 declared the roar of the motor car to be more beautiful
than anything by Michaelangelo, “noise arriving confused
irregular, from the irregular flow of life—renew mankind—the
art of noise should not limit itself to imitative reproduction”,
said Futurist Luigi Russolo who believed through the use of
recorded music the world was opened up to an infinite range of
sounds.
Some other new musicians used new technology to draw
them back not forward. Hungarian composer, Béla Bartók
went into country side to capture sounds of Hungarian folk
music. Through the new ability to play tunes over and over
again, he was able to discover features previously unnoticed—
“subtle alterations could now be pinned down—fusion of
classic, folk, modernists sounds could only be composed in this
new modernist age of recorded machines”213. Consequently,
through his collection and analytical study of folk music, he
was one of the founders of comparative musicology, which
later became ethnomusicology.
“It seemed with all the recorded noise, music could go in
any directions—repertoires exploded in volume and variety
even in Harlem where the iconic crucible of African American
life was able to records colorblind eclectic music—treatments
between old religious, gospel with classical, organic creative
human sound which survived in style—recording didn’t freeze
sound in its tracks, it allowed it to evolve.”214
213
214
Ibid.
Ibid.
A Synoptic Archeology of Sound Poets
229
7.5 The Beginning of Silence
With the onset of WWI writers seemed to be recording not
so much the sights of the war, but instead the furious blasts
and deafening sounds. It was the sound, more than the sights,
that would prove most traumatizing to all involved. In 1918
the British neurologist Edwin Ash warned that sounds of war
may have caused the most loss of morale amongst the soldiers
as the cumulative effect of the horror and fear which would
eventually led to shell shock. As such, “sensitivity to noise grew
after the war as the ominous roar of battlefields were compared
to cities and the mechanistic modern world. Mental disorder
was no longer a disease of soldiers, but had rather become a
national aliment from the noise of the cities. The 20th century
eventually would be labeled a war of nerves.”215
On the radio, the BBC hired educated “sounding”
announcers. They recognized as equally as Goebbels in
Germany that the use of the radio could bind a nation together
through sound. “Democratic ends was being pursued through
undemocratic means as the national radio sought to create social
unity amounting to single way of thinking—uniform middle
brow British mentality to create common interests, tastes,
attitudes—as the nature of radio was used to encourage people
to think and feel alike. Mass delusion through hypnotic radio.”216
Scholars at Harvard university decided to test the
influence of the device. In one experiment—volunteers
listened to voices and described their reactions: strong, mental
impressions of the strangers they heard—they described
mood, politics, appearance, both hit and miss descriptions of
the disembodied voices were invested with personality by the
215
216
Ibid.
Ibid.
230
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part II — The Arts
volunteers. In the second experiment, volunteers were asked
to read a text, another group, to listen to a text read. As it
turned out, the group which had read were much more critical
and questioning than the group that was simply listening.
The listening group was more inclined to believe everything
they heard. “The human voice for them was more interesting,
persuasive and compelling then the written word.”217 It was as if
the disembodied voice wasn’t speaking to a national audience,
but individually to them and was treated like a trusted friend.
Artfully constructed speeches swayed most listeners as people
felt closer to the voices, even if they were on the other side of
the ocean.
In 1920 the composer Eric Satie felt “a need to create
‘furniture music’, music as a part of the surrounding noises,
to take them (surrounding noises) into account in creating
the music, a music that was melodious without imposing
itself to fill up awkward silences between guests, banalities,
and forced street noises.” Taking his idea into account, the
invent of pop music happened. Fragments of pop melodies,
remixed and played over and over, like gregorian chants,
became hypnotic sounds in the background of stores, homes,
eventually cars, malls, everywhere one went/goes. Everyone
stopped talking. Given the amount of real noise, it became
more important than ever to preserve music as something
with meaning and let one be taken away out of their
mundane world, just as the carnival had been used centuries
before. Now it was broadcast live to make drones of the mass
population. Sounds were to be “heard” but not “listened to”,
simply as background music. And the majority of the world
closed their ears and truly stopped listening.
217
Ibid.
A Synoptic Archeology of Sound Poets
231
On January 1st, 1952, American composer John Cage
wrote his most famous work: 4’33”
The piece was composed of four minutes and 33 seconds
of “silence”, split into three movements. The piece was designed
to encourage the audience to appreciate the incidental sounds
that occurred during this period of listening - chairs scraping,
coughs, the sound of traffic outside - and consider them to
be musical. In fact, what John Cage really wanted to do was
encourage people to simply start using their ears again, to start
listening—through attention to silence, or the fact that what
was established thousand of years earlier, there never really is
silence, even in the middle of nature, especially in the middle
of the dark.
7.6 The Art of Resonance
Tod Dockstader — Quatermass
1 Jan 1964
Tod Dockstader releases an album comprised of various
“sound objects” (recordings of anything in which Dockstader
took interest), cut together into compositions. Dockstader
claimed to have sourced 125 hours worth of recorded material
during the Quatermass recording sessions.
Maryanne Amacher — City Links
1 Jan 1967
Sound artist Maryanne Amacher begins a series of sound art
works that transmit the sounds of an urban environment (in
this first instance, various spots within the town of Buffalo) to
an exhibition space elsewhere, via the use of dedicated, high-
232
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part II — The Arts
quality telephone lines.
This first “City Links” piece was 28 hours long. These works
(dubbed with the term “telematic”) still run to this day, despite
Amacher’s death in 2009.
Alvin Lucier - I Am Sitting In A Room
1 Jan 1969
American Composer Alvin Lucier records himself narrating
a text in a room, and then feeds the recording back into the
room to be recorded again. He repeats this process until only
the resonant frequencies of the room can be heard.
Danish sound artist Jacob Kirkegaard used Lucier’s piece as the
basis for his “4 Rooms” release in 2006, in which he recorded
the resonance and tones resulting from excess radiation in
various spaces in Chernobyl.
Lou Reed - Metal Machine Music
1 Jan 1975
American rock musician Lou Reed releases what is considered
to be an early example of noise music, as well as often being
classified as a work of contemporary sound art. The album
revolves entirely around guitar feedback and effects, set at
different speeds. It received a scathing critical response upon
its release, from an audience accustomed to hearing Reed’s
rock-orientated material.
A Synoptic Archeology of Sound Poets
233
7.7 Sonic Boom
Stuart Dempster, Pauline Oliveros, Panatois —
Deep Listening
1 Jan 1989
Three musicians are lowered into Fort Warden water cistern
and record “Deep Listening” - four music pieces that utilize the
cistern’s 45 second reverberation. The instruments used include
vocal, accordion, trombone, didgeridoo, conch shell, pipes and
garden hose.
David Toop’s Sonic Boom
27 Apr 2000
“Sonic Boom” becomes the first major sound art exhibition
in the UK, bringing together 23 sound artists to exhibit their
work at the Hayward Gallery in London. The exhibition was
curated by British sound artist David Toop. Featured artists
included Brian Eno, Ryoji Ikeda and Max Eastley.
SoundFjord Opens
1 May 2010
The UK’s first sound art gallery opens. The gallery is focused
on creating a dialogue within sound art, encouraging the
growth of the sound art community via performances, lectures,
workshops and sound walks.
Susan Phillipsz wins the Turner Prize
6 Dec 2010
Susan Phillipsz becomes the first sound artist to win the
Turner Prize for her “Lowlands” piece, in which Susan
recorded herself singing the Scottish lament “Lowlands
234
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part II — The Arts
Away” and played the recordings under three bridges on the
banks of the River Clyde in Glasgow. Philipsz predominantly
creates sound installations using recordings of her own voice
that are played in specific geographical sites to “heighten the
visitor’s engagement with their surroundings while inspiring
thoughtful introspection.”
Perhaps, just as the cave people did with their voice before
they turned the light on to paint.
The Birth of the Art of Collaboration
7.8 Silence
235
PART III :
Conclusion
237
8.
D’où Venons Nous /
Que Sommes Nous
/ Où Allons Nous:
The Birth of the Art of Collaboration:
Creating Fictive World Formulae
SO IT SEEMS, IN CONCLUSION, there is never really any
real conclusion, only infinite observations and equally infinite
creations. It sounds as though, from the very beginning,
sound arrives first: breathing, echoes, rhythms, listening,
silence. If we open our ears and shut our eyes, we can enter.
Suspension of judgement lies within, inside the zero space,
visuals arrive. In the visuals we progress through seven
perceptions in all stages until we transform into the thing we
see in the dreamscape. We come out of the zero space into
poiesis and use rational thinking to blend literal words which
announce without subjective metaphor, (or ambiguity) that
which has revealed itself. Words come last. Suspension of
judgement meets rationale, then repeat.
While some poets may be adept at multiple arts, there
is normally one artistic capacity of the four, more acute than
the others, sometimes two, rarely all. This work proposes at
239
240
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part III — Conclusion
the behest of the poets worldwide, we bring the individual
poets together, perhaps thirty per year. There are currently 210
countries demarcated on the map in the year 2014. In order for
every country to be explored by the four poets collaborative
creations of hypostasis of place using visuals, sound, words
and movement in performances, the project proposed would
essentially be complete every seven years, at which time,
the non-narrative creations would merge into the totality
of the whole overarching narrative and arrive at a Fictive
World Formulae, creating a global archipelago of community
awareness.
An Experiment:
≤ ¿ birth {creations ∞ (hypostasis of place) ∞
destructions} death ? ≥
In-between something else happens. In blank spaces:
z(e)ro spaces, the void—nothing, and the infinity of infinity.
A subjective universality only in the pre-poiesis, perhaps.
(e): the mathematical constant of the repeated z(e)ro spaces
throughout the anthropomorphic history of the arts. It is only
an experiment: an opening. In the overlapping and superpositioning of the multiple Being engaging with multiple
Being(s) for the sake of collaborative creation. For the sake of
the experiment: to understand, to discover if small pockets
of poets can arrive in their zero spaces, in suspension of
judgement, both alone, and with others and then move into the
rational with equal collective force.
Our shamanistic ancestors were often considered mad,
emotionally volatile, hyper-sexual, imbalanced. And yet it was
only through their ability to find balance, as leaders of the
The Birth of the Art of Collaboration
241
tribes, that the rest of the tribe could be awarded peace and
stability in the community, as the leader withheld the capacity
to embody both forces within and manipulate them into
form. Poïesis. The only way for them to arrive in such a state,
however, was through a collaborative community effort. All
our ancestral poetry-poets, visual-poets and sound-poets, as
discovered in this work, as well, created to balance the tensions
of the forces within. Goethe, Dickinson, Beckett all sought to
find the balance. Alessandro de Francesco, in his work, and in
his Being, found that balance. As Poetist, he can both go in and
come out engaging Others without the slightest demonstration
of judgement. That is not to say, we should try to eliminate or
even ignore our judgment in some moral or ethical Christianlike closed state of Being, only that perhaps, through silence
and economy of words, we should not demonstrate it in the
immediate encounters through aggressive actions or words. Or
as Wolfgang Schirmacher says, “no action is the best action”.
We are no longer prehistoric Beings. Through it seems we
have come back to a similar place, we have come there with
thousands of years of experience behind us to guide us into
guiding not a small tribe in a cave into that balance, but a
global community.
Poetic creations should no longer be diffused only to
the small elite educated classes. What we need now is to
use the technology and media we have created to offer a
Gesamtkunstwerk, as Wagner sought to do, for everyone, and
in doing so, blur the dualisms and the class divisions, and offer
everyone the ability to experience poiesis, and in doing so,
participate.
To avoid the capitalistic encounter with the poetic
creations, this research was made with the underlying objective
242
Z(e)ro Spaces: Part III — Conclusion
to create a foundation where tax deductible donations can
be received to support the poets in their collaborative work
each year in a location where fresh air, water, earth and spirit
can allow for optimal concentration without any economic
disruption—as the poets themselves, especially outside
of the Occidental world, are most often the ones without
sufficient means to truly engage in such a stimulating learning
environment for the betterment of themselves and the world
around them. This project, essentially aims to unite and help
liberate potentialities of the poets, everywhere, and in doing
so, hopefully, create a global sense of community for everyone
else.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
1.
De Francesco, Alessandro Pour une théorie non-dualiste
de la poésie (1960-1989), PhD dissertation, University of
Paris-Sorbonne, PhD advisor: Georges Molinié, pp. 21-22
and 380-381.
2.
Greene, Roland, Stephen Cushman, Clare Cavanagh,
Jahan Ramazani, Paul F. Rouzer, Harris Feinsod,
David Marno, and Alexandra Slessarev. The Princeton
Encyclopedia of Poetry and Poetics. Princeton: Princeton
UP, 2012. Print.
3.
Jarry, Alfred, and Simon Watson. Taylor. Exploits &
Opinions of Doctor Faustroll, Pataphysician: A Neoscientific Novel. Boston, MA: Exact Change, 1996. Print.
p.21-23
4.
Mason, John Hope. The Value of Creativity: The Origins
and Emergence of a Modern Belief. Aldershot, Hampshire,
England: Ashgate, 2003. Print.
5.
Zizek, Slavoj. The Ticklish Subject: the Absent Centre of
Political Ontology. London: Verso, 1999.
6.
Levine, Stephen K. Poiesis: The Language of Psychology and
the Speech of the Soul. London: Jessica Kingsley Pub., 1997.
Print.
7.
Schirmacher, Wolfgang, “MEDIA AESTHETICS: The
Homo Generator.” European Graduate School, Saas-Fée.
Aug. 2011. Lecture.
8.
Sloterdijk, Peter. “The Allies; Or, The Breathed Commune.”
Introduction. Bubbles. Cambridge, Mass: Semiotext(e),
2011. N. pag. Print.
9.
Gardiner, Marguerite, George Gordon Byron Byron, and
Ernest J. Lovell. Lady Blessington’s Conversations of Lord
243
244
Z(e)ro Spaces
Byron. Princeton, NJ: Princeton Univ. Pr., 1969. Print.
10. Derrida, Jacques. “Cogito and the History of Madness.”
Writing and Difference. Trans. Alan Bass. London:
Routledge, 2001. N. pag. Print.
11. Derrida, Jacques. “Force and Signification.” Writing and
Difference. Chicago: University of Chicago, 1978. p.7-8
Print.
12. Derrida, Jacques. “Signature Event Context.” Limited Inc.
Evanston, IL: Northwestern UP, 1988. Print.
13. Nancy, Jean-Luc. The Inoperative Community.
Minneapolis, MN: University of Minnesota, 1991. Print.
14. Derrida, Jacques. “Edmon Jabès and The Question of the
Book.” Writing and Difference. Chicago: University of
Chicago, 1978. 85. Print.
15. Young, Edward. Conjectures on Original Composition:
1759. Leeds: Scolar, 1966. Print.
16. Badenhausen, Richard. T.S. Eliot and the Art of
Collaboration. Cambridge, U.K.: Cambridge UP, 2004.
Print.
17. Valéry, Paul, and Thomas MacGreevy. Introduction to
the Method of Leonardo Da Vinci: , Translated from the
French of Paul Valéry of the Académie Française by Thomas
McGreevy. London: J. Rodker, 1929. Print.
18. Heidegger, Martin. Being and Time. New York: Harper,
1962. Print.
19. Eliot, T. S. The Love Song of J. Alfred Prufrock. New York:
Ameron, 1930. Print.
20. Husserl, Edmund, and Donn Welton. The Essential
Husserl: Basic Writings in Transcendental Phenomenology.
Bloomington, IN: Indiana UP, 1999. Print.
21. Cavalier, Robert. Symposium Outline. Plato and The
Nature of Eros. Carnegie Mellon University, n.d. Web. 17
Feb. 2014.
22. Plato. “Symposium.” Symposium. N.p., n.d. Web. 17 Feb.
2014.
23. Derrida, Jaques. “Plato’s Pharmacy.” Tel Quel (1968): Print.
Bibliography
245
24. Price, David W. History Made, History Imagined:
Contemporary Literature, Poiesis, and the past. Urbana:
University of Illinois, 1999. Print.
25. Vico, Giambattista, Jason Taylor, and Robert C. Miner. On
the Most Ancient Wisdom of the Italians: Drawn out from
the Origins of the Latin Language. New Haven, CT: Yale
UP, 2010. Print.
26. Vico, Giambattista, and Thomas Goddard Bergin. The New
Science. —. Ithaca: Cornell UP, 1948. Print.
27. Verene, Donald P. Vico’s Science of Imagination. Ithaca:
Cornell UP, 1981. Print.
28. Nietzsche, Friedrich Wilhelm, and Daniel Breazeale.
Philosophy and Truth: Selections from Nietzsche’s Notebooks
of the Early 1870’s. Atlantic Highlands, NJ: Humanities,
1979. Print.
29. Dreyfus, Hubert L. “Being and Power: Heidegger and
Foucault.” University of Berkeley Philosophy Department.
Regents of the University of Berkeley, 2004. Web. 25 Feb.
2014.
30. Foucault, Michel, and James D. Faubion. Power. New York:
New, 2000. Print.
31. Alexander Ferrari Di Pippo. The Concept of Poiesis in
Heidegger’s An Introduction to Metaphysics. In: Thinking
Fundamentals, IWM Junior Visiting Fellows Conferences,
Vol. 9: Vienna 2000
32. Gellman, Jerome, “Mysticism”, The Stanford Encyclopedia
of Philosophy (Summer 2011 Edition, Edward N. Zalta
(ed.) Plato.stanford.edu. Retrieved 2014-02-26.
33. Nietzsche, Friedrich Wilhelm, Oscar Levy, and Robert
Guppy. “The Birth of Tragedy.” Complete Works. The First
Complete and Authorized English Translation. New York:
Russell & Russell, 1964. N. pag. Print.
34. Schirmacher, Wolfgang, “PARALLEL ETHICS” European
Graduate School, Saas-Fée. Aug. 2011. Lecture.
35. Heidegger, Martin. The Basic Problems of Phenomenology.
Bloomington: Indiana UP, 1982. Print.
36. Bergson, Henri, and Mabelle Louise Cunningham
246
Z(e)ro Spaces
Andison. The Creative Mind. New York: Philosophical
Library, 1946. Print.
37. Negus, K. and Pickering, M. (2004). Creativity,
communication, and cultural value. London; Thousand
Oaks; New Delhi: SAGE Publications.
38. McMahon, Darrin M. Divine Fury: A History of Genius.
New York: Basic, 2013. Print.
39. Türck, Hermann. The Man of Genius. London: Black, 1914.
N. pag. Print.
40. Nietzsche, Friedrich Wilhelm, and R. J. Hollingdale. Thus
Spoke Zarathustra: A Book for Everyone and No One.
Harmondsworth, England: Penguin, 1969. Print.
41. Arendt, Hannah. The Human Condition. Chicago: U of
Chicago, 1958. Print.
42. Runko, M. A. and Albert, R. S. (Eds.) (1990) Theories of
creativity. Newburry Park, CA: Sage Publications.
43. Albert, R. S. (1983). Genius and eminence: the social
psychology of creativity and exceptional achievement.
International Series in Experimental Social Psychology:
International Series in Experimental Social Psychology, v.
5. Oxford, New York: Pergamon Press.
44. Simonton, D.K. (1984). Genius, creativity, and leadership:
Historiometric inquiries. Cambridge, Mass: Harvard
University Press.
45. Currie, R. (1974). Genius: An ideology in literature.
London: Chatto & Windus.
46. Bloom, Harold. “What Is Genius?” Introduction. Genius:
A Mosaic of One Hundred Exemplary Creative Minds. New
York: Warner, 2002. P. 5 Print.
47. Thadden, Elizabeth Von. “Visionäre: Die Unserer Zeit.”
Die Zeit Nº 42 (2011): n. pag. 18 Oct. 2011. Web. 10 Mar.
2014.
48. Gauguin, Paul. Where Do We Come From, What Are We?
Where Are We Going? 1897-1898. Oil on canvas. Museum
of Fine Arts, Boston.
Bibliography
247
49. Nietzsche, Friedrich Wilhelm, Oscar Levy, and Robert
Guppy. “The Birth of Tragedy.” Complete Works. The First
Complete and Authorized English Translation. New York:
Russell & Russell, 1964. N. pag. Print.
50. Homer : His Accomplishments, Beliefs, Ideas, Biography.
Heroes. Western Culture Global, n.d. Web. 09 Mar. 2014.
51. Bowker, John. Introduction. The Oxford Dictionary of
World Religions. Oxford: Oxford UP, 1997. Print.
52. Lim, Timothy H. (2005). The Dead Sea Scrolls: A Very
Short Introduction. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
53. Taylor, Thomas, Alexander Wilder, and Albert L. Rawson.
The Eleusinian and Bacchic Mysteries. A Dissertation. New
York: J.W. Bouton, 1891. Print.
54. Shakespeare, William, and Samuel Johnson. The Plays of
William Shakespeare in Eight Volumes. London: Printed for
J. and R. Tonson, 1765. Print.
55. Schopenhauer, Arthur, and E. F. J. Payne. The World as
Will and Representation. New York: Dover Publications,
1966. Print.
56. Schopenhauer, Arthur, David Carus, and Richard E.
Aquila. The World as Will and Presentation. New York:
Pearson Longman, 2008. Print.
57. Nietzsche, Friedrich Wilhelm, Walter Arnold Kaufmann,
and R. J. Hollingdale. The Will to Power. New York:
Random House, 1967. Print.
58. Freud, Sigmund, Josef Breuer, James Strachey, Anna
Freud, and Angela Richards. The Standard Edition of the
Complete Psychological Works of Sigmund Freud. London:
Vintage, 2001. Print.
59. Adler, Alfred. The Neurotic Constitution: Outlines of a
Comparative Individualistic Psychology and Psychotherapy.
New York: Moffat, Yard, 1917. Print.
60. Frankl, Viktor E., and Ilse Lasch. Man’s Search for
Meaning: An Introduction to Logotherapy. Boston: Beacon,
1962. Print.
248
Z(e)ro Spaces
61. Emerson, Ralph Waldo. Representative Men. S.l.: Bohn,
1850. Print.
62. Gauchet, Marcel. The Disenchantment of the World: A
Political History of Religion. Princeton, NJ: Princeton UP,
1997. Print.
63. Eckermann, Johann Peter, Johann Wolfgang Von. Goethe,
Frederic Soret, and John Oxenford. Conversations of
Goethe. S.l.: Bell, 1883. Print.
64. Goethe, Johann Wolfgang Von. Poetry and Truth. London:
Bell, 1908. Print.
65. Bloom, Harold. “Hokmah: Lustre 4.” Genius: A Mosaic
of One Hundred Exemplary Creative Minds. New York:
Warner, 2002. 160-61. Print.
66. Gundolf, Friedrich. Goethe. Berlin: G. Bondi, 1916. Print.
67. Goethe, Johann Wolfgang. Elegy from Marienbad.
Translated by Edgar Alfred Bowring
68. Râmbu, Nicolae. O demonismo da criação na filosofia de
Goethe. Trans/Form/Ação,Marília, v. 35, n.3, p. 67-80,
Set./Dez., 2012.
69. Baudelaire, Charles, and Jonathan Mayne. The Painter of
Modern Life, and Other Essays. London: Phaidon, 1964.
Print.
70. Thirwell, Adam. “How Baudelaire Revolutionized Modern
Literature.” New Republic 21 Feb. 2013: n. pag. Web. 21
March 2014.
71. Calasso, Roberto, and Jean-Paul Manganaro. La Folie
Baudelaire. Paris: Gallimard, 2011. Print
72. Blake, William, and Geoffrey Keynes. Jerusalem; the
Emanation of the Giant Albion. 1804. Printed by W. Blake.
Clairvaux, France: Trianon; Distributed by B. Quaritch,
London, 1974. Print.
73. Köhler, Joachim. Zarathustra’s Secret: The Interior Life of
Friedrich Nietzsche. New Haven: Yale UP, 2002. Print.
74. Nietzsche, Friedrich Wilhelm. The Antichrist. New York:
Arno, 1972. Print.
Bibliography
249
75. Dickinson, Emily, 1830-1886. A. (Emily) note/poem to
Austin [Dickinson] [ca.1864] Pencil; 1p. MS Am 1118.5
(B19). Houghton Library, Harvard University, Cambridge,
Mass.
76. Bloom, Harold. “Din: Lustre 9.” Genius: A Mosaic of One
Hundred Exemplary Creative Minds. New York: Warner,
2002. 345. Print.
77. Dickinson, Emily, 1830-1886. Poems: Packet XVI, Fascicle
25 (part). Includes 14 poems, written in ink, dated ca.
1862.
78. Bloom, Harold. “Binah: Lustre 5.” Genius: A Mosaic of One
Hundred Exemplary Creative Minds. New York: Warner,
2002. 345. Print.
79. Beckett, Samuel. How It Is. New York: Grove, 1964. Print.
80. Beckett, Samuel, Martha Fehsenfeld, Lois More. Overbeck,
George Craig, and Daniel Gunn. The Letters of Samuel
Beckett. 1941-1956. Cambridge, UK: Cambridge UP, 2011.
Print.
81. McDonald, Ronan. The Cambridge Introduction to Samuel
Beckett. Cambridge, UK: Cambridge UP, 2006. Print.
82. Deleuze, Gilles 1966. Bergsonism. Trans. Hugh Tomlinson
and Barbara Habberjam. NY: Zone, 1991
83. Adorno, Theodor W. Trying to Understand Endgame. New
German Critique, 1961. Print.
84. White, Micah M. “The Birth of Altermodern | Adbusters
Culturejammer Headquarters.” The Birth of Altermodern.
Adbusters, 19 Feb. 2010. Web. 28 May 2014.
85. De Francesco, Alessandro. “Augmented Writing.”
Augmented Writing. www.augmentedwriting.com N.p.,
n.d. Web. 29 Apr. 2014.
86. De Francesco, Alessandro. Redéfinition. Mix. 2010. French
edition.
87. Lewis-Williams, J. D., and T. A. Dowson. “The Signs of All
Times: Entoptic Phenomena in Upper Palaeolithic Art.”
Current Anthropology 29.2 (1988): 201. Web.
250
Z(e)ro Spaces
88. Whitley, David S. Cave Paintings and the Human
Spirit: The Origin of Creativity and Belief. Amherst, NY:
Prometheus, 2009. p. 49-50 Print.
89. Lacoue-Labarthe, Philippe. Poetry as Experience. Stanford,
CA: Stanford UP, 1999. Print.
90. Richard Muther, The History of Painting, Henry and Co.,
London, 1896
91. Badiou, Alain, and Oliver Feltham. Being and Event.
London: Continuum, 2006. Print
92. Gombrich, E. H. The Story of Art. London: Phaidon, 1995.
Print.
93. “Heilbrunn Timeline of Art History.” Neoclassicism. N.p.,
n.d. Web.
94. Vaughan, William. German Romantic Painting. New
Haven, CT: Yale UP, 1980. Print.
95. Golding, John. Visions of the Modern. Berkeley: U of
California, 1994. Print.
96. “FIUWAC Statement.” Free International University World
Art Collection, n.d. Web.
97. Kester, Grant H., The One and the Many: Contemporary
Collaborative Art in a Global Context, Duke University
Press, Durham and London, 2011.
98. Enwezor, Okwui “The Production of Social Space as
Artwork,” 225
99. Bishop, Claire. Artificial Hells: Participatory Art and the
Politics of Spectatorship. London: Verso, 2012. Print.
100. Rancière, Jacques, and Gregory Elliott. The Emancipated
Spectator. London: Verso, 2009. Print.
101. Hendy, David, Noise: A Human History of Sound and
Listening, Profile Books, London, 2013.
102. Magee, Bryan (1988), Aspects of Wagner, Oxford: Oxford
University Press.
103. Dahlhaus, Carl (tr. Mary Whittal) (1979), Richard
Wagner’s Music Dramas, Cambridge: Cambridge
Bibliography
251
University Press.
104. Millington, Barry (ed.) (2001), The Wagner Compendium:
A Guide to Wagner’s Life and Music (revised edition),
London: Thames and Hudson Ltd.
105. Adorno, Theodor (tr. Rodney Livingstone) (2009), In
Search of Wagner, London: Verso Books.
Think Media: EGS Media Philosophy Series
Wolfgang Schirmacher, editor
A Postcognitive Negation: The Sadomasochistic Dialectic of American
Psychology, Matthew Giobbi
A World Without Reason, Jeff McGary
All for Nothing, Rachel K. Ward
Asking, for Telling, by Doing, as if Betraying, Stephen David Ross
Memory and Catastrophe, Joan Grossman
Can Computers Create Art?, James Morris
Community without Identity: The Ontology and Politics of Heidegger,
Tony See
Deleuze and the Sign, Christopher M. Drohan
Deleuze: History and Science, Manuel DeLanda
DRUGS Rhetoric of Fantasy, Addiction to Truth, Dennis Schep
Facticity, Poverty and Clones: On Kazuo Ishiguro’s ‘Never Let Me Go’,
Brian Willems
Fear and Laughter: A Politics of Not Selves ‘For’ Self, Jake Reeder
Gratitude for Technology, Baruch Gottlieb
Hospitality in the Age of Media Representation, Christian Hänggi
Itself, Robert Craig Baum
Jack Spicer: The Poet as Crystal Radio Set, Matthew Keenan
Laughter and Mourning: point of rupture, Pamela Noensie
Letters to a Young Therapist: Relational Practices for the Coming Community, Vincenzo Di Nicola
Literature as Pure Mediality: Kafka and the Scene of Writing, Paul
DeNicola
Media Courage: ImpossiblePedagogy in an Artificial Community, Fred
Isseks
Metastaesthetics, Nicholas Alexander Hayes
Mirrors triptych technology: Remediation and Translation Figures,
Diana Silberman Keller
Necessity of Terrorism political evolution and assimilation, Sharif
Abdunnur
No Future Now, Denah Johnston
Nomad X, Drew Minh
On Becoming-Music: Between Boredom and Ecstasy, Peter Price
Painting as Metaphor, Sarah Nind
Performing the Archive: The Transformation of the Archive in Contemporary Art from Repository of Documents to Art Medium, Simone
Osthoff
Philosophy of Media Sounds, Michael Schmidt
Polyrhythmic Ethics, Julia Tell
Propaganda of the Dead: Terrorism and Revolution, Mark Reilly
Repetition, Ambivalence and Inarticulateness: Mourning and Memory
in Western Heroism, Serena Hashimoto
Resonance: Philosophy for Sonic Art, Peter Price
Schriftzeichen der Wahrheit: Zur Philosophie der Filmsprache, Alexander J. Klemm
Scratch & Sniff, Peter van de Kamp
Shamanism + Cyberspace, Mina Cheon
Sonic Soma: Sound, Body and the Origins of the Alphabet, Elise
Kermani
Sovereignty in Singularity: Aporias in Ethics and Aesthetics, Gregory
Bray
The Art of the Transpersonal Self: Transformation as Aesthetic and
Energetic Practice, Norbert Koppensteiner
The Ethics of Uncertainty: Aporetic Openings, Michael Anker
The Image That Doesn’t Want to be Seen, Kenneth Feinstein
The Infinite City: Politics of Speed, Asli Telli Aydemir
The Media Poet, Michelle Cartier
The Novel Imagery: Aesthetic Response as Feral Laboratory, Dawan
Stanford
The Organic Organisation: freedom, creativity and the search for fulfilment, Nicholas Ind
The Suicide Bomber; and her gift of death, Jeremy Fernando
The Transreal Political Aesthetics of Crossing Realities, Micha Cárdenas
Theodore, Sofia Fasos
Trans Desire/Affective Cyborgs, Micha Cárdenas
Trans/actions: art, film and death, Bruce Barber
Transience: A poiesis, of dis/appearance, Julia Hölzl
Trauma, Hysteria, Philosophy, Hannes Charen
Upward Crashes Fracture’s Topoi: Musil, Kiefer, Darger, Paola
Piglia-Veronese
Other books available from Atropos Press
5 Milton Stories (For the Witty, Wise and Worldly Child), Sofia Fasos
Korahais
Che Guevara and the Economic Debate in Cuba, Luiz Bernardo
Pericás
Grey Ecology, Paul Virilio
heart, speech, this, Gina Rae Foster
Follow Us or Die, Vincent W.J., van Gerven Oei
Just Living: Philosophy in Artificial Life. Collected Works Volume 1,
Wolfgang Schirmacher
Laughter, Henri Bergson
Pessoa, The Meaphysical Courier, Judith Balso
Philosophical Essays: from Ancient Creed to Technological Man, Hans
Jonas
Philosophy of Culture, Schopenhauer and Tradition, Wolfgang Schirmacher
Talking Cheddo: Teaching Hard Kushitic Truths Liberating PanAfrikanism,
Menkowra Manga Clem Marshall
Teletheory, Gregory L. Ulmer
The Tupperware Blitzkrieg, Anthony Metivier
Vilém Flusser’s Brazilian Vampyroteuthis Infernalis, Vilém Flusser